14 CHANNEL COMPUTER SYSTEM 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL 

Futaba Digital Proportional R/C System 

C€0682© 

1M23N27902 

14 CHANNEL COMPUTER SYSTFJ 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL 

Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http:/Avww.f'utabn-rc,com/faq 

Entire Contents © 2012 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTION 4 

•Support »nd Service 4 

•Application, Export, ami Modification .5 

• Definitions of Symbols 6 

•Safety Precautions (do not operate without 

reading) 6 

BEFORE USE 10 

• Features of 14SG 10 

• Contents and technical specification* il 

•Accessories 12 

• Transmitter controls ,.,.13 

Canliuns on handling antenna 14 

I.ED monitor 14 

Switch (SA-SH) 15 

Digital trim (TI-T4) IS 

Volume (LD, R.D) 15 

Slide Lever (l.S, RS) 15 

HOME/EXIT, U.MENU/MON. Button 15 

Touch sensor 16 

Stick adjustment 17 

SI) card 19 

Connector/Plus 21 

Installation and removal of the battery 22 

• Receiver nomenclature 24 

• Receiver's antenna installation 26 

• Safety precautions when installing servos...27 

• S.BUS/S.RUS2 Installation 2« 

• S.BUS Wiring example 29 

• S.KUS2 System 30 

•S.BL\S7S.Bl'.S2 Devkc.vritmfi 31 

•Telemetry System 32 

BASIC OPERATION 33 

• Battery Charging 33 

How to charge the NiMH Buttery 33 

• How to (urn ON/OFF the transmitter 34 

When turning on 34 

When turning off 34 

Low battery alarm and auto shut-down 34 

Warning display at power on 34 

• Registration of the user's name 34 

• Home scii'eti 35 

User Menu 36 

•Link procedure (T14SG/R70U8SB) 37 

•Range testing your R/C system 3!) 

RACE1VER AND SERVO INSTALLATIONS 

•Receiver and servos connection 40 

•Servo connection by model type 41 

MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE... 44 

•Airplane/glider basic setting procedure 44 

• Helicopter basic setting procedure 4fi 

FUNCTIONS OF SYSTEM MENU 50 

Trainer 51 

Display 54 

User Name 55 

Sound 56 

H/W Setting 57 

Start SEI 59 

Auto Lock 62 

Information 63 

SUUS Servo 64 

FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU 67 

(Common Functions) 

Linkage Menu functions table 67 

Servo Monitor 68 

Model Select 69 

Model Type 71 

System 73 

Function 76 

Sub-Trim 78 

Servo Reverse 79 

Fail Safe 80 

End Point 81 

Servo Speed 82 

Throttle Cut (Air/Hell only) 8$ 

Idle Down (Air only) 84 

Swash Ring (llcli only) 85 

Swash (Heli only, except H-l) 86 

TI-T4 Setting 89 

Warning 90 

Telemetry '>1 

Tclc?nctry:R\-batl 92 

Telemetry:E\t-volt 93 

Telemetryitemp 94 

Tcle«nelry:rpni 95 

Telrmetry:a!titude 96 

Tcletnetryivarlo 97 

Tclenietryibattcry 98 

Telemetryrdistance 99 

Tt'lemctry.'Spwd 101 

Sensor. 102 

Scnsonrdoad 103 

Sensonrcgister 103 

Seiisor:relocate 

Sensoriset slot 104 

Data Reset 105 

FUNCTIONS OF MODEL MENU 1 106 

• Common Functions 106 

Servo Monitor (Linkage Menu) 

Condition Select (Giid/ffeli oniy) !07 

Dual Rate 109 

Program Mix Ill 

Fuel Mix (Air,'Heli only) i 13 

• Airplane/Glider Functions 115 

Model Menu functions list 115 

Pitch Curve (Air/Glid) 117 

THR Curve (Air oniy) 118 

THR Delay (Air only) 119 

AIL Differential (Exeept 1 -A 11.) 120 

Flap Setting (2-FLP and up) 121 

AIL to Camber FLP (2-AIL+2-F1 .P and up)122 

AIL to Brake FLP (Olid only.4-FL.P) 123 

AIL to RUI) 124 

RUI) to AH. 125 

Camber Mix (Except I-A1L) 127 

ELE to Camber (Except I-AIL) 129 

Camber FLP to ELE(2-AIL+l-FLPand up) J 30 

Butterfly (Glid only, normal wing 2-AIL and 

up, flying wing Z-AIL+1FLP and up) 131 

Trim Mix (Glid only, 2-AIL and tip) 133 

Airbrake (Air only, 2-AlL and up) 135 

Gyro (Air only, for GYA type gvro) 137 

V-tail 139 

Ailevator..., 140 

Winglet (Flying wing only) 141 

Motor 142 

RUD to ELE (Air only) 144 

Snap Roil (Air only) 245 

•Helicopter Functions 147 

Model Menu functions list 147 

1MT Curve/Pit trim 148 

THR Curve/Throttle hover trim/Throttle 

liniiter 151 

THR Hold 154 

Swash Mix 155 

THR Mix 156 

PIT to RUD (Revolution mix) 157 

Gyro (for GV type gyro) 15S 

Governor 161 

APPENDIX 164 

Timer STI/ST2 164 

Switch Setting Method 166 
INTRODUCTION Application, Export, and Modification 

Thank you for purchasing a Futaba* FASSTesl-2.4GHz' MSG scries digital proportional R/'C system. This 

system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make (be 

best use of your system and to fly safely, please rcud this manual carefully. If you have any difficulties 

while using your system, please consult the manual, our online Frequently Asked Questions (on the web 

pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the Futaba Seiviee Center. 

TASSTest: Fuciba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend svMiiin telemetry 

Due to unforeseen changes in production proceduies, the information contained in this manual is subject to 

change without notice. 

Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your 

hobby's "off season" to ensure safe operation. 

IN NORTH AMERICA 

Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. 

Please be sure to regularly visit the MSG Frequently Asked Questions web site at www.fiuaba-rc.com/ 

faq/. This page includes extensive programming, use, set up and safety information on the MSG radio 

system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this 

web page. If you do not find the answers to your questions there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for 

information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response. 

Don't have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge ai most public libraries, schools, ami 

other public resources. We find internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items can 

be printed and saved for future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or 

holiday. If you do not wish to access the internet for information, however, don't wony. Our support team;; 

are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you. 

FOR SERVICE ONLY: 

Futaba Service Center 

3002 N. Apollo Drive, Suite I 

Champaign, 11.61822 

Phone: 217-398-0007 

www.futaba-re.coin/scrvice.html 

Email: servicc@futaba-rc.com 

FOR SUPPORT: 

(PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS) 

Please start here for answers to most questions: 

www.fiitaba-rc.com/faq/ 

Fax:217-398-7721 

Phone: 217-398-8970 option 2 

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA 

Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems 

or service needs. 

Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems 

sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region's support 

center (or assistance. 

1. This product may be used for model airplane or surface (boat, car, robot) use. It is not intended for use 

in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is 

subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/Telecommunications and is restricted under Japanese !aw to 

such purposes. 

2. Exportation precautions: 

(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws 

governing the counliy of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is 

then re-exported to other countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export, Prior approval of (fie 

appropriate government authorities may be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter 

outside your eountty, and not the authorized Futaba distributor in your country, please contact the seller 

immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met. 

(b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations, 

and an application for export approval must be submitted. This equipment imust not be utilized fo operate 

equipment other than radio controlled models. 

3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of pans: Futaba i.$ no/ responsible for unauthorized 

modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the 

warranty. 

Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.) 

This device, trade name Futaba Corporation of America, model number R7008SB. complies with part 15 of 

the FCC Rules. Opcniiion is subject to the following two conditions: 

(! ) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesircd 

opera i ion. 

The responsible party of this device compliance is: 

Futaba Service Center 

3002 N Apollo Drive Suite I, Champaign, IL 61822 U.S.A. 

TEL (217)398-8970 or E-mail: suppori@futaba-rc.com (Support) 

TEL (217)398-0007 or E-mail: serviced) fiitaba-rc.com (Service) 

The RBRC. SEAL on the nickel-cadmium battery contained in Futaba products indicates that 

Futaba Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect 

I and recycle these batteries at the end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the 

United States. Hie RBRC. program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickelcadmium batteries into die trash or municipal waste system, which is illegal in some areas, 

(for USA) 

You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please 

call 1-800-8BATTERY for information on NiCd battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation of 

America's involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and 

conserving natural resources. 

*RHRC is a trademark of the Kcciiatgcabfc Butler.' Recycling Corporation. 

Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement (for U.S.A.) 

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant 

to Part ]5 of the FCC Rules. These limits arc designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful 

interference in a residential installation. 

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and. if not installed and used in 

accordance with the instiuctions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there 

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause 

harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment olT 

and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 

--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 

--Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 

--Consult the dealer or your Futaba Scrivcc center for help. 

CAUTION: 

To assure continued FCC compliance: 

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user's 

authority to operate the equipment. 

Exposure to Rndio Frequency Radiation 

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20cm must be 

maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. 

This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 

Meaning of Special Markings 

Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks: 

A DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not 

carried out properly. 

A WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury 

to the user if not carried out properly, or procedures where the probability of superficial injury or 

physical damage is high. 

A CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to tiie user is small, but there is a 

danger of injury, or physical damage, if not carried out properly. 

0- Prohibited 0= Mandatory 

NiMHANiCd Battery 

® Clinrge the batteries! (See Charging the NiCd batteries, for details.) Always recharge the transmitter 

and receiver batteries before each flying session. A low battery will soon die potentially, causing loss 

of control and a crash. When yon begin your flying session, reset your TMSCj's built-in timer, and 

during the session pay attention to the duration of usage. 

©Stop flying Ion# before your bakeries becojne low on charge. Do not rely on your radio's low 

battery warning systems, intended only as a precaution, to tell you when to recharge. Always 

check your transmitter and receiver batteries prior to each flight. 

Where to Fly 

We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs 

and fields by asking your nearest hobby dealer, or in the US by contacting the Academy of Model 

Aeronautics. 

You can also contact the national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA), which has more than 2,500 

chartered clubs across the country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured 

newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below. 

Academy of Model Aeronautics 

5161 East Memorial Drive 

Mimcic, IN 47302 

Tele. (800) 435-9262 

Fax (765) 2894248 AMA 

or via the Internet at http:Umnv.modelaircnift.org SINCE 1936 

O Always pay particular attention to the flying field's rules, as well as the presence and location 

of spectators, the wind direction, and any obstacles on the Held. Be very careful (lying in areas near 

power lines, tall buildings, or communication facilities as there may be radio interference in their 

vicinitv, 

Warning: Always keep electrical components away from small children. 

FLYING SAFETY 

A WARNING 

To ensure the safety of yourself and others, please observe the following precautions: 

OJIave regular maintenance performed. Although your 14SG protects the model memories with 

non-volatile EEPROM memory (which does not require periodic replacement) and not a battery, the 

transmitter still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system 

to the Futaba Service Center annually during your non-flying-scason for a complete checkup and 

6 
NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling instructions 

IMPORTANT! 

Use only the Fufabu special charger included \vjib ibis set or other chargers approved by Futaba to 

charge the NiMH batteries in the T14SG transmitter included with this set. 

St is important to understand the operating characteristics of NiMH/NiCd batteries.Always read the 

specifications printed on die label of your NiMH/NiCd battery and charger prior to use. Failure to follow 

die proceeding precautions can quickly result in severe, permanent damage to the batteries and its 

surroundings and possibly result in a FIRE! 

IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS 

® Do not attempt to disassemble NiMH/NiCd packs or cells. 

O Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to come in contact with moisture or water at any time. 

0 Always provide adequate ventilation around NiMH/NiCd batteries during charge, discharge, while in 

use, and during storage. 

$ Do not leave a NiMH/NiCd battery unattended at any time while being charged or discharged. 

O Do not attempt to charge NiMH/NiCd batteries with a charger that is NOT designed for NiMH/NiCd 

batteries, as pcunancnt damage to the battery and charger could result. 

O Always charge NiMJ-I/N'iCd batteries in a fireproof location. Do not charge or discharge NiMH/NiCd 

batteries on carpet, a cluttered workbench, near paper, plastic, vinyl, leather or wood, or inside an R/ 

C model or full-sized automobile! Monitor the charge area with a smoke or fire alarm. 

0 Do nol charge NiMH/NiCd batteries ai currents greater than the "1C" rating of the battery ("C" 

equals the rated capacity of the battery). 

Q Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to overheat at any time! Cells which reach greater than 140 degrees 

Fahrenheit (60~C) should be placed in a fireproof location. 

O NiMH/NiCd cells will not charge fully when too cold or show full charge. 

0 U is normal I'vr (foe batteries to become warm during chatging, but if the charger or battery becomes 

excessively hot disconnect the battery from the charger immediately!! Always inspect a battery which 

has previously overheated for potential damage, and do not re-use if you suspect it has been damaged 

in any way. 

0 Do not use a NiMH/NiCd battery if you suspect physical damage has occurred to the pack. Carefully 

inspect the battery for even the smallest of dents, cracks, splits, punctures or damage to the wiring 

and connectors. DO NOT allow the battery's internal electrolyte to get into eyes or on skin—wash 

affected areas immediately if they come in contact with the electrolyte. If in doubt, place (he battery 

in a fire-proof location for at least 30 minutes. 

0 Do not store batteries near an open flame or heater. 

0 Do not discharge NiMH/NiCd batteries at currents which exceed the discharge current rating of the 

battery. 

0 Always store NiMH/NiCd cells/packs in a secure location away from children. 

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Handling Instructions 

(SI) card is not included with this set) 

0 Never remove the SD card or turn oil power 

while entering data. 

0 Never store the SD card where it may be 

subject to strong static electricity or magnetic 

fields. 

0 Do not expose the SD card to direct sunlight, 

excessive humidity or corrosive environments. 

Q -'-S 

0 Do not expose the SD card to dirt, moisture, 

water or fluids of any kind. 

0 Always hold the SD card by the edges during 

installation and removal. 

0 Be certain to insert the SD card in the correct 

direction. 

At the flying field 

To prevent possible damage to your radio gear, turn the power switches on and oil'in the proper 

sequence: 

1. Pull throttle stick to idle position, or otherwise disarm your motor/engine. 

2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen. ' 

3. Confirm the proper model memory has been selected. 

4. Turn on your receiver power. 

5. Test all controls. If a servo operates abnormally, don't attempt to fly until you determine the cause of 

the problem. 

Test to ensure that die FailSafc sellings are correct after adjusting them. Turn ihe transmitter off and 

confirm the proper surface/throttle movements. Tumi the transmitter back on. 

o. Start your engine. 

7. Complete a lull range check. 

X. After flying, bring your throttle slick to idle position, engage any kill switches or otherwise disarm 

your moior/cDgine. 

9. Turn off receiver power. 

10. Turn oil'transmitter power. 

If you do not (urn on your system in (his order, you may damage your servos or control surfaces, 

flood your engine, or in the case of electric-powered or gasoline-powered models, the engine may 

unexpectedly turn on and cause a severe itijuty, 

0 While you are getting ready to lly, if you place your transmitter on the ground, be sure that the 

wind won't tip it over. If it is knocked over, the throttle stick may be accidentally moved, causing 

the engine lo speed up. Also, damage to your transmitter may occur. 

O In order to maintain complete control of your aircrafl it is important that it remains visible at all 

times. Flying behind large objects such as buildings, grain bins, etc. is not suggested. Doing so may 

rcsuii in ihe reduction of (he quality of the radio frequency link to the model. 

0 Do not grasp the transmitter's antenna during flight. Doing so may degrade the quality of the 

radio frequency transmission. 

0 As with all radio frequency transmissions, ihe strongest area of signal transmission is from the sides 

of the transmitter's antenna. As such, the antenna should nol be pointed direcliy at the model. If your 

flying style creates this situation, easily move the antenna to correct this situation. 

0 Don't fly in the rain! Water or moisture may cater the transmitter through the antenna or slick 

openings and cause erratic operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a 

contest, be sure to cover your transmitter with a plastic bag or waterproof barrier. Never fly if 

lightning is expected. 

BE FOR IS USE 

Features 

FASSTest system 

The TJ4SO transmitter has adopied the newly developed bidirectional communication system 

"FASSTest".Data from the receiver can he checked in your iransmitter. FASSTesl is a maximum 14 

channels (linear 12 channels -t- switch 2 channels) 2.4GH/ dedicated system. 

S.BIJS2 system 

By using l|ie S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a 

minimum amount of cables. 

Model types 

Six swash types are available for helicopters. Six types of main wings and three types of tail wings are 

available for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing funclicms necessary (or each model type are set in 

advance at the factory, 

Data input 

Large graphic LCD and new type Touch Sensor substantially improve ease of setup. 

Stick 

Improved feel, adjustable length and tension. 

Ni-.MU battery 

T14SG is operated by a 6.0 V/1.800 mAh Nickel-Metal Hydride battery. 

SI) curd (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included) 

Model data can be saved to an SD card (SD:32MD-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T14SG transmitter 

software files are released, the software can be updated by using an SD card update. 

Edit button 

Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately "Returned" lo the HOME 

screen during operation. Selling operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch 

Vibration function 

Selects a function that alerts ihe operator lo various alarms and timers by vibrating the transmitter in 

addition to sounding a buzzer. 

Contents and Technical Specifications 

(Specifications a«d rating- are subject to change without notice.) 

Your 14SG includes the following components: 

• TI-ISG transmitter Inr airpbnrs or helicopters 

• R700SSB Receiver 

• HT51TS00R NiMH battery & Charger 

• Li-re spacer foi optional FT2F210Mi/FF2FI 7001J LiFc batlciy pack. 

• Switch harness 

• Neck strap 

•The set contents depend on flso type of set. 

Transmitter T14SG 

(2-stick. 14-channol, FASSTcst-2.4G system) 

Transmitting frequency: 2 4(111? band 

System: MSSTtsiMCH, FASSTc.il I ?.CH, FASST MULT, FASST ?CH, S-FHS.S, win-liable 

Power supply. 6.0V HT5F1800B NiMH battery 

Receiver U7008SB 

OrASSTcst-2.4(r system, titul antenna diversity, S.BUS system) 

Power requirement: .V7V-7.4V h.ittei")' or regulated output From F'.SC, etc. (* I) 

Size: 0.9K * 1.86 x (1.56 in. (7.4.9 x 47.3 •< 14.3 mm) 

Weitfhi: O.^g p7. (10.9;;) 

f* 1) When using PSC'smake sure that the regulated output capacity meets your ttMij;c application. 

Note: The battery in the TI4SG transmitter is not connected to the battery 

connector nt initial. Please conned the battery connector before use. 

10 r.-. 

UM-> 11 
The following Additional iteccssorle.s arc available from your dealer. Refer to a Futiiha catalog 

fur marc information: 

Transmitter controls 

• HTSI-lSimn Transmitter battery pack - (lie (lHOOmAh) transmitter NiMii battery pack may be 

easily exchanged with a tVcsit one to provide enough capacity tor extended flying sessions. 

• FT2F:21lH>B/!:T2Fl7(iyB Transmitter LiFc battery pack can also be used by using an exclusive 

spacer. However, charge with the charger only for I.iFe. 

• Tiaincr cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot ieani to Hy easily 

by placing the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note thai the T14SG transmitter may be 

connected to another T14SG system, as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The 

T14SG transmitter uses one of the three cord plug types according to the transmitter connected. 

(Refer to the description at the TRAINER function iimmctions). The part number of this cord is: 

FUTM4405. 

• Servos - there are various kinds of servos. Please choose from the setvos of Futaba what suited 

the mode! and the purpose of using you. Ifyou utilize a S.BUS system, you should choose a S.DUS 

servo. An analog servo cannot be used if "FASSTcstl2CH mode" is used. 

• Telemetry sensor - please purchase an optional sensor, in order to utilize bidirectional 

communication system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky. 

[Temperature sensor: SB8-01T] fAltitude sensor: SBS-01 A] jIU'M sensor magnet type : SBSOlRM](Ki\M sensor optica! type : SBS-OiROj [GPS sensor : SBS-OiGj (Voltage sensor ; SBS01V) 

• Nccksliap - a ncckstrap may be connected lo your T14SG system to make it easier to handle and 

improve your flying precision since your hands won't need to support the transmitter's weight. 

• Y-hiirncsscs, servo extensions, hub,etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-hamesscs, including 

a heavy-duty version with heavier wire, are available lo aid in your larger model and other 

installations. 

• Gyios - a vaiicly of genuine Futaba gyros is available Ibi your aircraft or helicopter needs. 

• Governor - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant 

head speed regardless of blade pifcii, load, weather, etc. 

• Receivers - various models of Futaba receivers may be purchased for use in other models. 

(Recti\ers for FASSTesi and FASST.S-l HSS types are available.) 

• Optional Charger - Futaba CR-2000 NiMH/NiCd Transmitter;Receiver Battery Charger. 

Yl -'-iU-iorclv.-.--

'IVanstnittur's Antenna: 

As with all radio frequency transmissions, 

the strongest area of signal transmission is from 

the sides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, 

the antenna should not be pointed directly ai the 

model If your Hying style creates this situation, 

easily move ibe aiiiewju to correct ibis situation. 

•Rotating antenna 

The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angled 

90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than (his 

can damage it. The antenna is not removable. 

High power . High power 

<!=] I C ' 

M 

you have- a transmute 

; .in ingle oi' ii figure. at 

>«r ance-ria will be goodie us 

N it, bending 90 degrees. 

/K Caution 

0 Please do not grasp the transmitter's 

antenna during Might. 

Doing so may degrade the quality of the RF 

Ciansiriissioii io flic model 

^ Do not carry the transmitter by the 

antenna. 

There is the danger thai the antenna wire will hreak 

and operation will become impossible. 

Oonot pull the antenna forcefully. 

There is the danger that the antenna wire will break 

act J operation will become impossible. 

Monitor I.ED display 

The status of the transmitter is displayed by 

<!i the boiiom Id) unil rigbi .sides of ibe 

"T14SG" logo. 

LEI) (Left) 

Displays the "noit-ddiiuN condition" warning. 

• Blinking 

Power switch is turned on when any 

condition switch is activated (in the ON 

stole). 

LEI) (Right) 

Displays the state of radio frequency 

transmission. 

• Off 

Radio waves ore in the OFF state. 

• On 

Radio waves ore being transmitted. 

• Blinking 

Range check mode. 

.vitc'n Type) 

• SA : 3 posifions." Alternate: Shan lever 

•S3 : 3 positions; Alternate; long lever 

•SC. : 3 positions; Alternate; Long leva 

• SD ; 3 positions; Alternate; Shar; level 

• SE : 3 positions; Alternate; Shori lever 

• Sf : 2 posifions; Alternate: Long lever 

• SO : 3 positions; Alternate: Short lever 

• SH : 2 positions: Momentary: Long lever 

Digital Trim TLT2,T3 and T4: 

This transmitter is equipped with four (4) 

digital trims. Each time you press a trim button, 

the trim position moves one step, ifyou continue 

pressing it. the trim position stalls to move faster. 

In addition, when the trim position returns to 

the center, the tone will change. You can always 

monitor (rim positions by referencing the LCD 

screen. 

•You can . 

^ m tlic T!-T<i setting >c 

• T/ic dm J Jos j fro; iv jo'J iiaiv ve: will I 

c display 

Volume L» unci HD; 

The volume LD and RD knobs alio' 

analog input. 

LS (Left). RS (right): 

The slide lever LS and RS oft'er analog input. 

*TiieT!4SG lt.'iiKii:i!U!f beeps «ln-n the lowr wsv.es to On 

HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON. Button 

HOME/EXIT 

j Button 

i \ 

'^fji 

rG.MENU/MONTj 

| Button J 

HOME/EXIT: 

Press Return to the previous 

screen 

Press and hold Return to the Home 

screen 

It pushes from HOME 

screen. 

To TELEMETRY display 

Push and hold for 

one D) second Irom 

HOME screen. 

Keylock On or Off 

U.MENU/MO.N,: 

Press ToSERVO MONITOR display 

Press and hold To User Menu display 

13 
Touch sensor operation 

Data input operation is performed using llie touch sensor. 

• Shoit 'lap' HiMsuwt-urr-., ---i pv,. (Ki. :M,'IX srjf«n) 

Workfnn 

• Shoit 'lap' 

II those.- n I i ' l)(..S8 7lK)W-MNW.«n>U.e U>potp=5fi. 

• Shoit 'lap' 

If liytutftnaoalAwiM t'W cu-so- :s b!«iu'i<j. rhfiWtt iscsr.;t-«j 

Wt'-^., -.1 -ye 

M.Vnt ,u | * Otinyef. to tie ''ovrir) e-r'.iir rrwe 

The ri-;tn:5 emc-.-orf. 

• TWO Silolt Helps' 

SYS ,'jinp to System Menu scrcei a recty. 

Jump Io linkage 

MDL Aj »t screens Jurrvu^ttNH. 

• Touch and hold lor 

one (1) second, Au>,o"OM£ Kcy:t>;l(0nc'0!l 

IH -

VfL.i, injury -feu na ;vj r.,r->v. f(f~.fit to no .iiU^miva'ai 

• Scrolling 

t.yuiy (irci 115 fit a.tvsav b-Vje iA ihe fITN tMrtn 

• Scrolling 

-

MiivtmtJir of cursor, value input t>r mude 

selection: 

Movement of the cursor on the menu screen 

and movement of the cursor among items on a 

setup screen can be controlled by scrolling your 

linger to the left and right in the direction of the 

arrow in the scrolling diagram above. You can 

also go 10 ihe next page, if there is a next page. 

This scrolling technique is also used for data 

input, value input, mode selection, and similar 

operations. Examples include: Value, ON, 01;F, 

1NH, ACT, etc. 

UTN billion: 

Touch the RTN button when you want to open 

a setup screen or to switch between cursor move 

mode (reverse display) and data input mode (box 

display). 

TJtis buiion am also be used as ihe enter button 

when a confirmation message is displayed on the 

screen, etc. 

V> 

SI button: 

When there is a next page on a menu screen or 

setup screen, you can go to that page by touching 

the SI button. In this case, (he cursor moves to 

the screen title item ofthe page. 

Exiting setup screen: 

To end the operation on a setup screen and 

return to the menu screen, move the cursor to the 

screen title item and touch the RTN button. 

To return to home screen directly, touch the S1 

button lor I second. 

Alternatively, move the cursor to the screen 

title iiem and touch the RTN button to return to 

the home screen from a menu screen. 

A\ Caution 

O 'Hie touch sensor may not operate 

correctly if spark nofsc is generated from 

a gasoline engine, etc. Please remove tlie 

transmitter to a location awuy from the 

noise source, 

Slick Adjustment 

Adjustment of the slick fever length 

You can adjust the length of stick levers, as 

you like. It is recommended to adjust the length 

of the sticks in line will i your ImikI size. 

Lever Head 

A 

\ 

1. Hold Ihe lever head 'B" ond turn the lever 

head "A" counter-clockwise. The loc::< will 

be released. 

2. Turn the iever-heod "A" clockwise os you 

hold ?he lever-head 8" alter plccrjg it as 

you like. 

Adjustment of stick lever tension 

The tension ofthe self-return type stick lever 

can be adjusted. 

1. First. Remove Ihe bottery cover on the 

boltoiri of the 'ronsmitler. Next, unplug the 

battery wire and remove the boheiy from 

ihe transmitter. 

2. Next, using o hond. remove the transmitter's 

side cover (rubber). When using Mode !, 

you will need to remove the side cover to 

expose ihe tension screw. 

3. Using your hond remove Ihe Iransmitle 

rear rubber grios. 

1. Use a smell Phillips screwdriver to adjust Ihe 

spring strength as vou prefer by turning the 

adjusling screw of the stick you wont fc 

adjust. 

CAUTION: If you loosen Ihe screw too 

much, it can interfere wilh Ihe operation of 

Ihe sticks internally. 

The stick con be 

odj'js'ed lc how 

quickly it returns io 

neutral. 

S. At the end of adjustment, re-ir 

cover ond rear grips. 

"The screw wtlhtouch the case. 

SI) Card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not 

included) 

The TI4S0 transmitter model data can be 

stored by using any commonly found SD card. 

When TI4SG transmitter update software is 

released, the software is updated using an SD 

card. The T14SG is capaM? of using SD cards 

with a memory size SD : 32MB-2GB SDHC : 

4GB-32GU. 

A\ Caution 

lie sure to turn off the power to (he 

transmitter before inserting or removing 

the Si> card. 

0 As the SD card is a precision device, do 

not use excessive force when inserting. 

Restrictions when using an SI) card 

The following restrictions apply when using a 

SD card: 

'Tilt SO cant ;misc firs! be inra'.iliWt) usraj! l.'.v TMSi 

dcdtt.itcd lanital, 'flic SI) c.ird camuu he vised a* i 

without loniianiiiy to tlic T14.SG. 

*l]iiU.ili/iii|; destroys ail thu <Utd previously saved <m It 

•j douitltiidi.il from 

Inserting/removing the SD curd 

l.Turn off the transmitter power and then 

open the battery cover at Hie bottom of 

IE» )) 

-0-

, r—— <2 

C3 

® Battery cover will open downward. 

2. The SD c.ird slot is '-.how here tri the figur 

below. 

18 

'iBvfiMV Ur> 1<? 
(Inserting the card] 

Turn -he SD cord so HioI the fronl of Hie 

co'd feces the rear cf the uansmitter and 

slide? Ihe cord into the card slot. 

"f'usli in iti" unlil ii i's fimily spited i'r: :(ir e;nd slul 

(Removing the card] 

V^hen Ihe SD card is pressed in once orjair-. 

the ca'd will be released from Ihe card 

slot, and can be removed. 

3. Close the batfery cover. 

Si) card iniiiiili/nliun 

To use an SD card will) Ihe T14SG, Ihe card 

fiuixf first he (iinn.iMecf. Once ("onnaUcd, tin- caul 

does nol have lo be reformatted. Formatting is 

perl'omied by (he T14SG. 

(IMPORTANT) When cm SO card is formatted 

tor the T14SG, ail pre-existing data is 

destroyed. Do no} format a card containing 

Important dala 

{Fomiatting procedure] 

1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of 

)he TI4SG, 

2.Turn on the T USG oower. When an 

unfoirnaiteu card is inseneo irito the T14$G. 

Ihe screen shown below appears. 

Connector/Ping 

3.11 'ho TUSG is ready to format. move the 

cursor !o (FORMAT) ana touch Ihe RTN 

button. (To cancel formatting, move Ihe 

cursor to (CANCEL) and touch the RTN 

button.) 

to (YES) and touch Ihe RTN 

DuriuK fonauuitit!, ihe (NOW 

(IMPORTANT) Do not turn off the power until 

ihe [FORMAT COMPLETED] message is 

displayed. 

5. End formatting by touching Ihe RTN buffon. 

SI) curd miller/writer 

Saving model data and update files (released 

from Futaba) lo ihe SD card I'roni your own 

PC. yon can transfer (hose Hie to your 'f 14SG 

transmitter. Equipment for reading and writing 

SD cards is available at most electronics stores. 

Stored data 

If you have a problem saving or reading dala 

after a long period of use, we suggest obtaining a 

new SD curd to avoid further difficulties. 

Tuteha is not responsible Cut eoir.putbaitnji any failure or 

Connector for trainer function 

When you use the trainer function, connect the 

optional trainer cable between ihe transmitters 

for tenclicrand sludenl. 

S.BUS connector (S.I/F) 

When selling an S.1HJS servo and le 

sensor, conned them both fiere. 

(Supply power by 3-wny hub or Y-harm 

Earphone plug 

It is not used n< •. (The function after upgrade) 

^ " 

JD) 

% 

"1Y ^ 4$ 

Charge 

Plug 

• tp§ 

H 

A. 

to) 

Connector for battery charger 

This is the connector for charging ihe NiMH 

bailery IIT5KISOOH that is installed in the 

transmitter. Do nol use any oilier chargers except 

the attached special charger corresponding to 

NiMH battery. 

A\ Warning 

0 Do not connect any other chargers except 

the special charger to this charging 

connector. 

"If you out ihe XiMll bjilcry ItTSrt SOOB iiom ihc 

irjiismiuer, yoa can use ihcoptiwut quickchargor (TRWhun formatting is completed. The [1'OUMAT 

COMPLUTIll)] iv.essjjie is displayed. Ucpcsnliiig on the 

card capacity and speed, fitrir,lilting »; jy lake as long as 

20 ' 

Installation and Removal of Ihc HT5F1800B 

Transmitter Battery 

Attachment of the battery 

I. Slide Ihe bolfery cover on the botfom oi 

ihe transmitter toward 'he right side one 

open it. 

2. Install the battery in the holder. 

3. Connect the battery connector. 

4. Close the batteiy cover completely. 

22 "-iM.rcrv:;-

Bntterv Removal 

Note: IT you remove the buttery while Ihe 

power is on, the data you have set will not 

be saved. 

1. Open ihe boltery cover. 

2. Disconnec! Ihe botlery connector. 

3. Press on the botlery release tab ond pull 

the bottery downwards to remove. 

4. Close the botlery cover completely. 

/K Warning 

Q Be careful not to drop (he battery. 

Never disconnect the battery connector 

from the T14SG transmitter after 

turning off tiie power until the screen Is 

completely blank and the transmitter has 

shut down completely. 

» lnicm.il devices such as memories my be damaged. 

« if there is any jvobieni, die iv.cs>age "Backup Error" 

When exchanging for (he LiFe battery 

(FT2F2100B/FT2FI700B) of an option, 

Attachment of the battery 

1.1'1-tSG to HTSF-I80CB is removed. 

2. A Life spacer (USG affochme 

inserted os shown in a figure. 

3. A Life batter/ (option) is inserted os showr 

in a figure. 

5. Close fhe baffery cover completely. 

6.T14SG is turned on and (LINKAGE 

MENU]=>(WARNING]=>(lOW BATTERY) Is 

called. 

7. It changes Into 6.0V from 5.4V. 

•Atioii! low biilltiy voliafcc, .d! ttie models included ill 

imc Iransmiuer are duinyed in common. ti eannoi set m 

ctillerciu vottape for every model Moremer. data re-et is 

The battery state inside T14SG 

Life SPACER 

/ 

Life FT2F2100B/1700B 

Charge of a LiFe buttery 

Note: LiFe battery cannot be charged with the 

charter of I4SG attachment. 

Be sure to remove a battery from T14SG and 

to charge from the charger only for LiFe. 

Balance chaigc * % 

is carried out from the rhaiger only fc 

A Warning 

Q Follow (he manual of a LiFe baltery. 

<$) Don't charge (he LiFe battery ividi the 

NiMH charger of 14SG attachment. 

* Ik sure lo remove from Ti 'SG and 10 charge with ihc* 

charger raly for !iiV: 

^ Be sure to change Ihe voltage of l.OW 

BATTERY WARNING into 6.0V from 

5.6V 
Receiver nomenclature 

Bufbre using ihe receiver, be sure lo re 

precautions listed in the following pages. 

Receiver R7008SB 

"! through 6": outputs for (lis channels I 

through 6 

"7/R": outputs of 7 channels and power. 

"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.1JUS port. 

|S,HUS Servo S.UUSGyro) * 

•When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set 

CH MODH of the following page to mode B or 

mode!). 

"S.9US2": outputs of S.f)VS2 jx>n. -

|S.BHS2 Servo S.BUS2 CvroTelemetrySensorp 

*When using 9 or more channels, us* an S.BUS 

function or use a second R7008SR and link both 

to your transmitter. 

Connector insertion 

Firmly insert the connector in the direction 

shown in the figure. Insert the S.BUS2 by turning 

it 90 degrees. 

Danger 

Receiver 

OSSS", 

£ 

A Danger 

0l)un'( connect a connector, as shown iti a 

before figure. 

tic?.:iug. lire and bums. 

A. Warning 

S.BUS2 connectors 

O Don't connect an S.Bl'S servo / gyro to 

S.BUS2 connector. 

LED Monitor 

This monitor is used to check the CM mode of 

Link/Mode Switch 

Use the small plastic, screw driver that was 

included with your receiver. 

The l.ink/Mode Switch is also used for (he CH 

mode selection. 

Extra Voltage Connector 

Use this connector when using a voltage 

telemetry device to send the batter)- voltage (DCO 

~ 70V) from the receiver to the transmitter. 

You will need to puichase the optional External 

Voltage input cable (CA-RVIN-7(lO) R.JTMX\S1 

You can then make a cable with an extra 

connector to the Externa! voltage connector. 

A Danger 

Don't touch wiring. 

""t short-circuit the battery terminals. 

abnonn.i! heating, tire and bums. 

® Please double check your polarity ( I and 

••••) when hooking up your connectors. 

<S) Don't connection (o Extra Voltage before 

turning on u receiver power supply. 

R7008SB CH Mode 

The R7008SB receiver is a very versatile 

unit. If h.is S I'WM outputs, S.BUS and S.HUS2 

outputs. Additionally the I'WM outputs can be 

changed from channels I-8 to channels 9- J4. If 

you only desire lo use i( as an 8 channel receiver 

(without S.BUS), i( can be used without any 

setting changes. 

The Tl'lSG has the ability to link to two 

R7008SH receivers,. One of them ouiputting 

channels 1-8 and the other outpuliing channels 

9-14 giving you 14 I'WM channels. Instructions 

for this configuration and S.BUS operation 

follow, 

k mps* iio 

[How to change the R70UXSB Channel mode.J 

1. Press ond hold down she Unk/Mode button 

on the R70QBS8 receiver. 

2. Turn the receiver on while holding down 

the Link/Mode button, when the LED 

begins to blink green/red the button may 

be released. 

3. The LED should now be blinking red in one 

of 'he patterns described by the chart 

below. 

5. When you reach fhe mode fhaf you w*h 

to operate in, press and hold the Mode/ 

Link bu'ton (or more than 2 seconds. 

6. Once locked into the correct mode Ihe 

LED will change to a solid color. 

7. Please cycle the receiver(s) power off ond 

back on again after changing the Channel 

Mode. 

C oj.1 , 

Receiver connector 

Setting channel 

Mode A 

1 ~ 8CH 

Mode B 

1 ~ 7CH 

Mode C 

0 ~ 14CH 

Mode 0 

9 ~ UCH 

9 

2 2 2 10 10 

1 1 15 

4 12 12 

5 5 5 13 13 

6 14 14 

7/B 7 7 

8/SB 8 S.BUS S.BUS 

Red LED blink 1 time 2time 3hme 4time 

Receiver's Antenna Installation 

The R700SSB has two antennas. In order lo maximize signal reception and promote safe modeling Futaba 

has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas and 

fly problem-free. 

To obtain the best results of the diversity 

function, please refer to the following 

instructions: 

]. The (wo anlennos must be kepi as straight 

as possible. Otherwise i! will reduce the 

effective ronge. 

2. The two antennas should be placed at 90 

degrees to each other. 

This is not a critical figure, but the most 

important thing is to keep the antennos 

away irorri each other as much as possible. 

Larger models can have large mefcf 

objects ;hat can cttenuafe the RP signol. In 

this case the antennas should be placed 

cit both sides ol ihe model. Then the besl 

RF signal condition Is obtained at any filing 

attitude. 

3. The cmenras must be kept away from 

conductive materials, such as metal, 

carbon and fuel tank by at least a half 

Inch. The coaxial aait of the antennas does 

nol need to follow these guidelines, but do 

not bend it in o tight raalus. 

4. Keep the antennos away from Ihe motor. 

ESC, and other noise sources as much as 

possible. 

26 

Mounting Hie Servo 

;:-r-vr" 

£ 

. , fv- _ _ . 

(Airpians/Gfidftrj (HeteopM 

Servo lead wires 

To prevent the servo lead cable from being 

broken by vibration during flight, provide a 

little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable 

points, Periodically check the cable during daily 

maintenance. 

Fasten about 5-10crn 

from ihe servo outiet so 

thai Ihfi lead wire is neat. 

Mounting fhe power switch 

When mounting a power switch to an airframe, 

make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than 

the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn 

the switch ON/OFF without binding. 

Avoid mounting the switch where it can be 

covered by engine oil and dust. In general, it is 

recommended to mount the power switch on the 

side of ilie fuselage that is opposite the mufiler. 

.Safely precautions wlien you install 

receiver and servos 

Warning 

Connecting connectors 

o Be sure to insert the connector until it 

stops at the deepest point. 

How (o prolect the receiver from vibration 

and water 

©Wrap the receiver with something soft 

such as foam rubber to avoid vibration. 

Jf there is a chance of getting wet, put the 

receiver in a walerproof bag qr balloon to 

avoid water. 

Receiver's antenna 

Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do not 

bind the receiver's antenna with the cables 

for servos. 

0 Locate the receiver's antenna as far as 

possible from metals or carbon fiber 

components such as frames, cables, etc. 

I reduce 

d raise, 

©Adjust your system so that pushrods will 

not bind or sag when operating the servos 

to the full extent. 

servo cojIJ be ilanijucil the lo force on '.ho gc.ir :rai;i 

and'o: pov.vr consumption CjUMMj: rapid biuery iL-jin. 

Mounting servos 

©Use a vibrnlion-proof rubber (such as 

rubber grommct) under a servo when 

mounting the servo on a servo mount. And 

be sure that the servo cases do nol touch 

directly to the metal parts such as servo 

mount. 

hk! (wsiihlj-i/.-im. 

> airfjaitw directly, vihra 
S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation 

This set uses the S.BUS/S.BUS2 .system. The wiring is as simplified ami dean mounting as possible, even 

with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can he quickly installed to the fuselage 

without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large number of 

servos used. 

• When using S.BUS-.S.BUS2. special settings and mixes in your transmitter may be unnecessary. 

• The S.BUS. S.IKJS2 servos memorize the number of channels themselves. (Settable with the TI4SG) 

• The S.BUSS.BUS2 system and conventional system (receiver conventional CM used) can he mixed. 

S.BUS Glider usage example 

.nnrpr 

S.BUS Acrobatic plane usage example 

I 0 

0-

3; Paved) "" | 

• 

i'?5SV< I I 

28 l .s 

S.BUS Wiring example 

! Receiver 'When using S'SB as S.BUS, you must set the receiver to 

Mode » or Mode I). See R7008SB CH MODI: TABLB. 

•S.BUS Servo 

Since the channel number is memorized by 

(he S.BUS itself, any connector can he used. 

When the SBD-1 (sold separately) is used, 

ordinary servos can be used with the 

S.BUS system. 

•Terminal box ajSg&Q 

}

;our connectors can be inserted 

A Warning 

Power supply 

^Please make sure that you 

use a battery that can deliver 

enough capacity Tor the 

number itnd kind oT servos 

used. Alkfil/ne butteries 

cannot be used. 

•When separate power supply used 

When /i large number' of servos are used or 

when high current servos are used, the servos 

can be driven by a separate power supply by 

using a separate Power Supply 5-way Hub. 

HUB 

Three connectors can be 

inserted. 

HU^jl 

Used when using a separate 

power supply battery. 

S.BUS2 System S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting 

When usiim the 8.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized. S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T14SG. Channel setting and 

" other data can he entered for the S.BUS<'S.BUS2 servos or sensors. 

S.BIJS2 TABLE 

Receiver port 

S.BUS Servo 

S.BUS Gyro 

S.BUS2 Servo 

S.BUS26yro 

Telemetry sensor 

S.BUS O o X 

S.BUS2 X (>50 • O c 

{&•) Don't connect S.BUS Servo. 

S.BUS Gyro to S.BUS2 connector. 

S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the 

correct receiver ports. I'lease refer to the instruction manual to make sure 

YOU connect to the correct one. 

S.BUS Servo 

S.BUS2 servo 

Connection is possible 

S.BUSZ gyro 

Connection is possible 

X Telemetry SSW 

Connection is impossible 

S.BUS/S.BUS2 Receivers 

device Battery 

(S.BIJS/S.BUS2 

Servo) 

(Telemetry sensor) 

1. Connecl the S.8US device and batlery you 

want to set with o 3-woy hub or Y-harnesses 

os shown in the figure. 

2. Turn on the truinniitter power. 

3. Call the setup somen. 

Scvo: Systcw Menu > S.BUS Servo 

Sertsor: Linkage Menu •-> Sensor 

4. Perform selling in accordance with eoch 

5. This seis the channel and other dofa for each 

S.SUS servo, or telemetry device TO be jsed 

with the S.BUS device or receiver. 

30 M 
Telemetry System 

Tlic 147008SD receiver ft:aun\:.s bi-diicctional communication with a FASSTest Futaba transmitter u 

the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port an impressive army of telemetry sensors may he utilized. It 

includes both standard PWM output pons and S.BUS output ports. 

* Telemetry is available only in the FASSTest 14CH mode. (12CH mode displays only Receiver bat 

voltage and Extra batter)' voltage.) 

* The telemetry function requires the corresponding receive! (R700SSB). 

* 'flu: T MSG will enter ami keep the II.) number of the R7008SB that it is linked to 

BASIC OPERATION 

•Telemetry sensor (sold separately) 

Your aire rafts data can be checked in the 

transmitter by connecting various telemetry 

sensors to the S.BUS2 connector of the 

receiver. 

• Siot No. 

Servos are classified by channel, but sensors 

are classified by "slot" . Since the initial slot 

No. of the T14SO is preset at each sensor, 

the sensors can be used as is by connecting 

them. There are ! -O i slots. 

. 1 

Slot 16 

Siot V 

Battery Charging 

Before charging batteries, read the "Cautions for handling battery and battery charger" in the section 

"NiMM-'NiCd Batten,- Safety and Handling Instructions". 

Mow to charge the NiMH battery HT5F1800B 

for the transmitter 

«.vitally siop. Run 

A Banger 

0 The NiMH battery HT5F1800B is only for 

your T14SG. Do not use this battery for other 

equipment. 

O Be sure to use the attached special charger to 

charge the battery. 

•If you '.aVe ihe NiMH tulicry JWSHSOOB out of the 

;run«:iiitei'. you cj:i iisv 'Jio opu.injl quick charger CR-2000 

period 

'in ;tu- c.i<e • iif NiMli NiCii h.iUeries, you iiuv find poor 

|iorforii:aiK'. : of the b.i'.fery ifyo:i li.ive usui the haltery 

only for a st tori period or if you repent t'haryiny white the 

Iwiiery is nn 1 fully discharged. II i« suggested to discharge 

! he buttery ! o ihe recommended level after use. h is. ako 

recommend <1 In charge llie littery just before use. 

[Method of charging battery] 

1. Connect the special charger to the wall 

socket {AC outlet). 

2. Connect the connectors to the T14SG 

charging jacK. 

1101 111! U.:

l) U 

•Ton otTthe transmitter u.rii!ech.trsmg the hattcry. 

3. Remove the battery olter IS hours. 

When turning 

THR Stick Slov, 

it Hie power of the transmitter 

. lurn on Ihe oov^er switch of Ihe transmitter. 

•The mc.wse "CHUCK RF CONDITION" is Ji>pl:iyc<l for 

7. Then, you 

transmitter beqms to 

How to stop the transmitter 

How to turn transmitter power ON/Ol'T 

When turning on ihe power, the TJ4SG 

transmitter will begin emmiting RF automatically 

alter it confirms the surrounding RF conditions. 

The T14SG transmitter also oilers the ability to 

auto shut-down. 

Registration of the user's name 

If so desired, the T14SG transmitter can 

indicate the owner's name. 

User's name setup screen 

1. Turn on Ihe power of the transmitter. 

'The home screen appears. 

2. Lightly touch the SYS button twice rapidly 

and the System menu appecrs. 

3. Select [USER NAME) in the System menu and 

touch ihe R!N bulton. 

1. "urn off the power switch o! the transmitter. 

Low battery alarm and auto shut-down 

When the battery voltage reaches 5.2V, an 

audible alarm will sound. Land your aircraft 

immediately. 

When the battery voltage readies 3.9V. the 

transmitter will be turned oiJ'automatically. 

•If you <lo TM,u,|.c;o:c ihe iraasiiiiitor lor move a slick, 

knob, swiicli or dii;iwl Uici) for 3U minuses. Ihe me^.i-e 

"l>1.1:-\Si: TURN Oi l" I'OWIlli SWITCH' is lii.spljyc J ,rij 

jii auilihte alarm will siiainl. 

Warning display at power ON (Airplane/ 

Helicopter) 

When the ihrottlc stick during Power On'is at 

(he high side (or over 1/3 stick) a warning will be 

displayed. 

ptiTARA rn : SEcCEFuHI J EyiegB-Csx: L , f 

CHICEL lUWXVZabed 

Changing the « 

. Change the usei name as described betow: 

[Moving cursor in input box] 

Select [<•••] oi (—»|. and touch the RTN button. 

[Deleting a character! 

When |DELETE; is selected and the RTN butlon 

is touched, the character immediately offer 

the cursor is deleted. 

•Adding a character) 

When a character is selected (torn ihe 

character lisl and 'he RTN bulton is touched, 

that character is added at the position 

immediately after the cursor. 

.-;ers long e; 

o. (A <| -<> 

2. At Ihe end of input, select [ENTER) and tuoch 

Ihe RTN butlon. (To terminate input and 

return to the original s?cte, select [CANCEL] 

and touch the RfN button.) 

Home screen 

Use the touch sensor to select the following display a 

button. The setting screen appears. 

•a to call each setting s i, and touch die RTN; 

System timer 

This shows Ihe occumuloled Nmc since 

Ihe Iciest reset. (Hour]:(Minjte) 

Use the cursor lo highlight this, 1hen 

touch the RTN button for one second 

to reset (he system timer. 

Up/Down timer (ST1, ST2) 

Timet is displayed here. 

Touch Ihe R7N bultcn ot the fxxj;fxx. 

>cxj item io stcrt/siop ihe timer. 

Use the cursor to highlighi this, then 

touch the RTN button a! Ihe sn or ST2 

item to call the timer set-up screen. 

rription 

Key lock 

• Touch the SI butlon or push the 

HOME/EXIT bulton tor one second Ic 

lock/unlock the key operation. 

In Ihe key lock mode the key icon is 

displayed here. 

SD card indicator 

Battery Indicator 

• When the botieiy voltage 

reoches S.2V(Change iri 

Warning Menu), the alarm 

will beep. Lond your oircra't 

"mntediotely. 

- Model type 

Model Niime 

The model name that 

is currently used is 

displayed here. 

Use the cursor to 

highlight this, then 

touch the RTN bultort 

to call Ihe model 

select set-up screen. 

System mode 

System(FASSTesll4CH etc.) 

mode is displayed here. 

Use the cursor to highlight this, 

then touch the RTN button 

to call the trequency set-up 

screen. 

Digital trim ('1*1 to T4) 

'(rim position is displcyed here. 

You cctn select the display uni 

on the home screen on tin 

T1-T4 selling scteen within lh< 

linkage menu. 

' Homo screen 

7ouch toe RTN bu'ton at 

Ihe clock icon to coll the 

2"'1 home screen (large 

s=ze timer). 

'2SV51 

00:00.00 

00:00.00 

Model timer 

This snows the accumulated time 

since the latest feset. (each model) 

(Hour|:(Winute) 

Use ihe cursor to highlight this, 

then louc'n the RTN bulton lor one 

second lo reset the mcc'el timer. 

Condition name (Hcli/Clitlcr) 

!n the normal condition, move the 

cursor to the condition nome and 

touch the RTN button. The condition 

nome is chcnged end blinks. 

It is possible lo operate the digital 

trim in alt conditions. 

VPP candidou # (Air) 

• When VPP function is ossigned lo o 

channel, the current VPP condition 

fi is displayed here. 

•'Biisif. Opera*!'" 
A user menu which allows the user to 

customize an J display frequently used functions 

has. been added. 

I. When she "U.MENU" but;on is pushed for 

two seconds, the user menu appeors. 

fi\ Warning 

© Be sure to confirm (lie mode! name hcJbrc 

flying your aircraft. 

Q Check the battery voltage as often as 

possible and try to charge the battery 

estrtier. If the battery ulami makes a sound, 

hind your aircraft immediately. 

2. When the cursor high! ghts the aolled line. 

" " and 'he KIN button j.s touched, 

the menu selection screen eppeors. 

CVm*33M" T74' 

SERVO :THR D6LRY 

DUAL RftTE •AIL D1FF, 

FROG. »HX :fltL-»RU0 

PIT COfiV£ 'Cf*IS€R MX 

IK* CURVE : ELE-tCfil'BER 

3. When the cursor is moved lo the setting 

that you to set to the user menu and Ihe 

RIM button is touched. Ihal setting screen 

is odded to the user menu. 

A. The registered setting screen can be 

colled by moving the cursor to it and 

touching the RTN button. 

I od * .H.; itu-1 

Link procedure (T14SG/R7008SB) 

Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order lo start operation, ihe receiver 

must be ij/jk't'd with ihe ID code oJ'the transmitter with which it is being paited. Once the link is made, 

the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless ihe receiver is to he used 

with another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary; 

otherwise ihe receiver will not work. 

6. When changing heifer/ fail-sole volloge 

from the 'nitial value 3.8V, voltage is 

changed here. 

' Only in KASSTest Mode. 

Link procedure 

1. Place Ihe transmitter and the receiver close 

to each other within half (0.5m) meter. 

Less than 0.5 m fftSSTei 

LINK If 

-HCHS1H 

2. Turn on Ihe licnsmitler. 

3. Select [SYSTEM! ot the Linkoge menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by 

touching the RTN button. 

:Vou can do ins inrouan ine LINKAGE Menu 

end scroll to bvstem ana press RTN. 

4. When vou use two ifec.oiveis on one model, 

you m _ . :) to [DUAL). 

•Only two receivers con be used. In 

"DUAL", two selling items come cut. Inpuf. 

respectively. 

"SVSTEH 

ID of a 

receiver displays 

iD of a viecondcry 

'eceiver aisplcys. 

7.[LINK] is chosen by scrolling and fne RTN 

button is pushed. The transmitter will emit a 

chime cis it starts the iTikng process. 

FRSSTesl-M 

sua 50* 

8. When the -ransmiTter starts to chime, power 

on the receiver. The receiver should link to 

the transmitter within about I second. 

In DUAL, o pnmary n 

is link previously. Next, c 

secondary receiver -s link, 

5. "P' will be chosen if it is used in France, others 

"G" general. 

9. 1? lining fails, on eiror message- is displayed. 

Bring the transmitter close; fo ihe receiver 

and repeat Ihe procedure cbove from Step 2. 

10. AC? will be chosen it telemetry is used. 

I! is INH when not using it. 

LIN* V8 

lit®" 

11. When a telemetry function is enabled, 

the receiving interval (clown-link interval) of 

sensor dala can be changed. If a DL interval 

is increased, the response of the sensor data 

clispicy becomes slower, but stick response 

will improve. 

Initial value: 1 .Os 

Adjustment range: 0Js~2.0s 

rsvsw" 

FfiSSTest-HCHSIHGLeG 

link f'eO* 

TELBI/eT*Y 

\SS! I ui on around your 

not link w <ju; uaisriutUT. In iliis e»s«\ 

LI'SLLI) M /« ,..|.,l .••veil <!!'f'.itiiu:iU'ly 

1 'lave i's!a 

is very ib .ngvrous il' you do not notice 

Jur 10 av niil iln' problem, we strntiyty 

.1 doubled 

^(.Uithe'L ' '

C 

c linking o| lerjiicm when tho drive nv.iior 

.• engine is 1 r-inniiiy. 

Hi l bo .ally 

• Vo-j mu • ili a Ui«. [f li.iih |.,iv.-cr 

wisor'iii yhirtli'sots' ' tclcincuv d'it;i 

will be st , - ritfcis cr sotu|>. 

' l.int: is rcqui:cd when a sysli'iu lype is changed. 

A Wo ruing 

O Aller the linking is done, please cycle receiver 

power and check thai the receher lo be linked 

is really under the control of the transmitter. 

O ')<* iU)l perform the linking procedure with 

motor's main wire connected or with the engine 

operating as it may re-alt in serious injury. 

Range Testing Your R/C System 

It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each Hying session. This enables you to 

ensure that everything is functioning as it should and to obtain maximum enjoyment from your lime flying. 

The T14SG (ranstnirter incorporates a system (hat reduces its power output <m<i allows you to perform such 

a range check. 

Range check mode 

We have installed a special "Range check 

mode" for doing a ground range check. To access 

the "Range check mode" touch and hold the RTN 

button while dinting on the fratismrtfer. Doing so 

will bring up POWER MODE menu. 

T* 

Range check procedure 

The present mood 

s the "Range check mode" touch the 

RTN button and the range check mode screen will 

appear. 

E CHcCK MODE Oil 

RESTART 

During this mode, the Rl* power output is 

reduced so the range test can be performed. In 

addition, when this mode ts activated the right 

LED on the front of the transmitter starts blinking 

and the transmitter gives users a warning with a 

beeping sound every 3 seconds. 

The "Range check mode" continues for 90 

seconds and after that the power will return 

to the normal level. To exit the "Range check 

mode" before the 90 seconds, select the "RANGE 

CHECK" al the top of the screen and touch ihe 

RTN button again. This mode is available one 

time only so if you need to re-use this function the 

transmitter power must be cycled. NEVER start 

flying when the "Range check mode" is active. 

Should you require additional time to perform 

a range check, highlight Restart belbre your time 

expires and press the RTN button one time. 

1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk 

away tram the model while simultaneously 

operaiing ihe controls. Have on assistant 

stand by the model to confirm that al! 

controls ore completely ond correctly 

operational. Vou should be able to walk 

approximately 30-60 poces from the model 

without losing control. 

2. If everything operates correctly, return to 

the model. Set the transmitter in o safe, yet 

accessible, location so it will be within teach 

alter starling the engine or motor. Be certain 

the throttle stick is in the low throttle position, 

then sfcrf the engine or motor. Perform 

another range check with your assistant 

holding Ihe aircraft wilh the engine running 

at various speeds. If the servos jitter or move 

inadvertently, there may be a problem, v/e 

would strongly si/gges? you do nol fly unlil the 

source o! the difficulty has been determined, 

look tor loose servo conneclions or binding 

pushrods. Also, be cerlain that Ihe boitery 

hos been fully charged. 

. . . .u* Range checking on 

low power. 

/\ Warning 

© Do not fly in the range check mode. 

•.Since ;tu- .'4;i£c uf Oio Mdio waves is s)nv-, if the 

'JS •-**MC<Vr,th,n. ••--tJtisic. Op.:-; aftrtnr- 39 
RI'.CI-;iVKR AND SERVO INSTALLATION 

Receiver and servos connection 

Connect tire receiver and saws in accordance with the connection diagram showi) below. Always roaJ ihe 

section (Before using]. When mounting the receiver and .servos to the fuselage, connect (he necessary points 

in accordance with the model's instruction manual. 

<$ connection diagram 

Always conned (he necessary number ol'sei\os. 

The receiver channel assignment depends 

model type. See (he Servo connect1 

type tables. 

Servo connection by model type 

The TI4SG liansmitierchannels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type 

selected with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for 

each mode! type is shown below. Conned the receiver and servos to match the type used. 

imire inli'r naiiipii. road liicdi-scriiiiion ofilie I'uiiuion menu. • • 

Airplane/glider 

•Normni wing arid V-tuil 

R 

X 

CH 

R TAileron 2Ailcion 2 Aileron+1 FtAP 2Allcroni-2FlAP 2Aileron-t4FLAP 4ASIcron+2FLAP 

X 

CH Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane «<r Airplane Glider Ali»l«ne Glider 

. fik'if:- • •Afccfl -AVaifc' AifcW. niik-'i . .Ato**,. ; Vfcfun . Wwcn AtiWi ' «•« ' 

•H5S-*. .."3y/.7' •y.aJ:': . slv«! •rzi&v, f-WS' ..st'.W S;V»: -i-iiu. 

.TivoKh1 ' Mnfcw'-'. T):in!!k: >Mo-. TM.'.iiV • J,W« M:'W< . : : 

A. P.'.viM' ftviSri"' ''Sl'dN. AiVsfi? 

<ie« " <WX7.i <«u :ww . AUX C. : - ^ 

: •• 

6 . -.1'? : • war , . .Wicl •• tbv2 : 

•j- AUPCVj. »JXS' •: W>>... . mi AJwtfiJ ?!*>' •ffcy? • : fl:p; : HM . •mp-

__ 

AW*/ L AU)f4' Ai)X5 AT/.' VW Autt n„-> ffep>. fUlrt fa,,7 fU(,2 

__ 

AUXl AUM CUT.BI- Cv*b« •d-kn «Ttf- C»s*.« C»mbf : .ms». 

IC AU>1 A'oxi AUXl SuUiTy A'JX! V?- b-jUffty 8v:;tr!iy 

It AUX! A UXl AUXl AJX: AUXl AUX! A'JX: AVXI "C'.C Ihrordc V.:ia 

o avjvi A'jyi AUXl r.-Jt- A'jyi AUX! A-.JXi A.1,7! '/r •V.*l w AUXl 

«v 5)V ,w •M v.v <.v, ,MV .V.V S'

A J .?<Y •v.v V« 

v.v V.V -v; v>v s* v.v SiV v.v sw v.v <w 

s 8. 8 

ul 

Aiivntor (Dual Elcviitor) 

R 

X 

CH 

R TAileron 2Ailnron 2Aiieron+lFLAP 2A!leroni-2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Ai|cron+2flAP 

X 

CH Ctlder Airplane Glider Ai (plane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider 

; ,V«CH . ASijXfl : AVai ; A islon . M^r A5««'i AVtio-i : Mixin 

.a-,-,.? -• •WJ V^%--

: {-«a>. : ' tr,;v ' : -:i!»*:. 

W;,..v 

V^%-- ffeiur' li-at.i'Je : . «>*<«:• 

-t it-.rfrf.'r Ksiwr : (t.ri'riff 'KvWiN Ajwnr 

••••&». . •' •Srer. . AUX6V 

; 

Cw:-; '•Hi?' • Ail'ViK?8<ori2 X Als.cr.3 'A3cK(i2' fisuj". .fltpl ASccM • .A3s»W.A 

_L feiv- r

:L-.,',A :: •A4HU>J ">)«', " fU»- ' ri-pS'. • '.<!«> ;i fi.i/. 

_L 

' M»« iV.'1 A.;xi ..3«v/ I ! Ijf.2 - I!J|V Il«^ 

AIM A'.«l (WW! Ca-nfcff C.vrtvl rv-h-. amb~ 

10 AUX1 A'JXf AUXl Bjtlttfy Vf? ?ul(frt:y G^v H^nt-ny Ge.v B.lWf!/ C.e« Bodily 

u AUX) A'jy.i AUXl A'JX! A'jyi VJX! Vff •v.'il T-.-ffJe yj!c. Throve 

1? AUXl AUXl AIM AJXi A'jyi AUXl A-JK\ AUXl a.,v> Kr.y.-: •«:si 

351 W v,v SW J'.V su iV/ SW S'.V <W w W W 

SW v« !W ::w v.v •AV SW S'.V W 

'-•Urxciwr aittj SiFlying wing, Delta wing • FASSTest14CH/FASST MULTi/FASST 7CH/S-FHSS 

2AiIeron+1FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP 

CH All Other H-4, H4X Swash 

Ailuort Aileton 

y

x

':''Z"-:u Llewto* Heyaix'r 'v;!; 

;r : Throttle :: 

. . Thtouie 

4 -•:-•• Riuidtr. i: . '•• :

: Rudder .. • 

5 Gyfc/HUO • • ; - GyiaWjl}: 

Pitch Hitch 

/ Ciovpmnr . ;;; ..-{ipyetfi.or i: 

8 . . '••' . Weirdie . • Elevator? 

9 Gyio2/All. Gyio?/Ali. 

10 Gy(o3/F:LE Gyroi/ELF. 

II AUXt AUX/ 

12 AUXl AUXl 

DG1 SW SW 

DG2 SW SW 

Flying wing, Delia wing (WinJet 2 Rudder) • FASSTest12CH 

R 

X 

2 Aileron 2Aileron+lFLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FlAP 

CH Airplane Glider Airplane Airplane Glider Glider Airptane Girder 

•i M -v u /t n w A! i. 1 0 trC< \1 0 f 

1 <} •i f J « < M t C U 

i ! M 5 (IT IA S H » H« k* ni A!> •» < 

» «« t- dt f ^ U-K1 Wc i < V 44 U •.i 0-

.5 • --iiflr. . * a I <• flay-.- lb 1 « f> I. 

) 1 !>• It. r i 1 ) ff } r w 3 

7 > Airtt.tu A ^ fl f , ft fl ! 

X •> t ^ >' iVP i !«-, ri»p? fl-T.I . i »r-i n»f f U'.j 

s V 1 <. 

c L . L t a-u-c t 

' 

A'jyi 

~r 

fc -*> C-fj' Ct-.ii } 

TGJ •v; V'V SW V.V S'.V 5".V v.v S'.V S'.V SW 

ill 

* U.ispui cliamacls differ by o.u-'r. s 

ihc rjiigi,- of ilu arrow of a figure. 

a ui;!c. When usiiig a syslcm wilii tow diaruicis, Out 

CH All Other H-4, H4X Swash 

Aileton Aileron 

fclevjlot tlevdlor 

'i Tlvoille Tfiiottle 

Rudder HlfvatorS 

Pi tch Pitch 

Gyro/HUD (iyfo/KJD 

Governor Govetnoi 

Governor 2 RiJdder 

Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL 

10 6yro3/£L£ GytoB/Llt 

DGI SW SW 

DG2 SW SW 

• Since the ct»8 doesn't work on the 7-ch mode, plcjse assign the 

elevator2 (I1-4, M4X) or the needle (all other) to 7 cliannncl if the 

governor is not used. 

4Z .:Ud %rw» 
b BASIC: SET; SG PI :O>ure 

Airplane/glider basic setting procedure 

i. Model addition and selection 

Initially, the T14SG assigns the first model to 

model-01 in the transmitter. The Model Select 

function of the linkage Menu is used to add 

models and to select amongst models which are 

already set. 

'Hf.BnrsKT"ft3t¥r-"5r' 

The T14SG is capable of storing data for up 

to 30 models in its internal memory. Additional 

model data can also !>e saved to an optional SD 

card. 

The currently selected model name is displayed 

in the center of the home screen. Before (lying and 

before changing any scuiugs, always cotilimi the 

model name. 

When a new model is added, the Model type 

select screen and System mode setup screen 

automatically appear. IMease be aware that the 

transmitter will stop transmitting temporarily when 

you change the model. 

When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver. 

2. Model type selection 

the a 

3. Fuselage linkage 

Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, 

etc. in accordance with the model's instruction 

manual. For a description of the connection 

method, see the Receiver and Servos Connection. 

Note that even for the same "airplane 

model", when the wing type and tall type 

are different, the channel assignment may 

be different. (The channel assigned to each 

function can be checked at the Function 

menu of the Linkage Menu.) 

MM i^4~ 

• If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust 

(he direction with the Reverse function of the 

linkage Mesne. 

ifllu NOSH: 6H1L2N0RH 

2ELE N35H: vVPP HORH 

31HS WWH: efiUXSNOftM 

<fiUD hCRM; •CWBKOftM 

sGE&RHOKWiofiUXi WORM 

» Adjust the neutral position and control 

surface angle with the linkage, and fine 

tune Ihern with the Sub-Trim and t;nc Point 

functions (angle odjustment). To protect the 

linkage, o limit position can clso be set with 

the End Point function. The tnd Point function 

can adjust the amount of up/down and lefi/ 

righ) movement and limil ol each channel. 

Select the model type matched to the aircraft 

with the Model Type select function of the Linkage 

Menu. For an airplane, select the model type from 

among the 2 types: airplane and glider. And then 

select the wing type and the tail type matched to 

4, Throttle cut setting (Air-plane) 

Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by a 

switch without changing the throttle trim position. 

Set throttle cut with the Throttle Cut function of 

the Linkage Menu. After activating the throttle cut 

function and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle 

position so that the carburetor becomes fully closed. 

For safety, the throttle cut function opeiates the 

throttle stick in the 1/3 or less (slow side) position. 

5- Idle down setting (Airplane) 

6. t)/k function 

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and 

flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the 

speed of the aileron, elevator, and flap servos can 

be adjusted. You can also set the Auto Mode, winch 

will link Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A 

separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the 

ON/Ol-K switch. 

The idling speed can be lowered with one touch 

by a switch without changing the throttle trim 

position. Perform this setting with the idle Down 

function of the Linkage Menu. Alter activating the 

Idie Down function and selecting the s'witclt. adjust 

the idle down speed. For safety, the idie down 

function acts only when the throttle stick is in the 

lowest part of its throw. 

•While (:ie Throttle Cut function is in opcr-iliim. the Idle 

8. Addition of flight conditions (Glider) 

The Condition Select function automatically 

allocates the normal condition (NORMAL) for 

each model. NORMAL is the delimit condition and 

is the only one active when a new model type is 

defined. 

1 f you want to add flight conditions, please refer 

to it description of the CONDITION function. 

D/R function is used to adjust the throw and 

operation curve of the stick functions (aileron, 

elevator, rudder and throttle) for each switch 

position (airplane) or each flight condition (glider). 

This is normally used after the modeler has defined 

the maximum throw directions in the find Point 

settings. 

(Airplane) 

fnaesniSTART 

SPEED ~ 

DISTANCE — 

liiv NORMAL is .( 

I'Iimso refer to ;hc sc 

:i;iains on until other 

ilch St'lection Method 

iv.ilion of tin- Itiyht 

•The Condition IX'lay caii b? proyaniineJ for e; 

TUc Concilium Delay is used to chasi#* the : 

smoothly w;>c:i svviirliing corutilmiv 

7, Airbrake (Airplane) 

This function is used when an airbrake is 

necessary when taking off or diving, etc. Please 

note: this menu item is only available under certain 

wing configurations. l

:or example, it will not appear 

if a single aileron wing type has been selected. 

The pre-sct elevator and flap offset amount can 

be activated by a switch. 

•••\l<nh'i Sciting } 

Meiit'optcr basic setting procedure 

This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the T14SG. Adjust the actual values, 

etc. to match the fuselage used. 

1. Model addition and selection 

Initially, the T14SG assigns the first model to 

modei-01 in the transmitter. To add new models 

or to select a model already programmed, use the 

Model Select function of the Linkage Menu. 

I'ynciioiis fur tltc chosen 

available for helicopters, 

•for a description of the s 

MODI-I.TVPK function. 

3, flight condition addition 

The transmitter offers up t< 

per model. 

c flight conditions 

This is convenient when selecting a model 

after entering the model's names in advance. The 

T14SG is capable of storing up to 3(1 models in the 

transmitter's internal memory. Additional models 

can also be stored in an optional SD card. 

The currently selected model is displayed in 

the middle of the screen. Before Hying and before 

changing any settings, always confirm the model 

name. 

When a new model is added, the Model Type select 

screen and system mode setup screen automatically 

appear. Change, or check that they match the swash 

type and receiver type of the mode! ussd. 

When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver. 

I0LEUP1 SE 

>DLEUP2 SE 

10LE0P3 SF 

HOUJ --

2. Mode! type and swash lypc selection 

If a different model type is already selected, 

select helicopter with the Model Type function of 

the Linkage Menu, anil then select the swash type 

matched to the helicopter. 

tmiumau ) 

HELICCPTER 

The Condition Select function automatically 

allocates five conditions for helicopters. 

(Initial setting) 

• NORMAL 

• IDLE UP! (SVV-E) 

. IDLE UP2 (SW-F.) 

• IDLS: UP3 (SW-f) 

•HOLD (Hold switch is not assigned iniliollv) 

Note: Since you moy accidentally activate 

a condition that not previously setup during 

flight which could cause a crash, we suggest 

deleting conditions that are not used. 

Tor a description of the condition deletion, refer u> the 

Condition Select function. 

The NORMAL condition is always on, and 

remains on until other conditions are activated byswitches. 

The priority is throttle hold/idle up 3/idle up 2/ 

idle up 1/normal. Throttle hold has the highest 

priority. 

The Condition Delay can be programmed for 

each channel and condition. The Condition Delay 

is used to change the servo throw smoothly when 

switching conditions. 

(General Might condition setting example) 

• Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate 

when swtlch OFF) 

dse from cog re darting 'o Covering. 

• Idle up 5: {Opiate at SW-E center) 

Use in stafi turn, loop, and other maneuvers. 

• Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-F forward side] 

Use -n rolls. 

• Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forworc side) 

U:e in auto rotation. 

40 l't" 

4. Servo Connection 5. Throttlc/Pitch c 

Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator, 

pitch, and other servos in accordance with the 

kit instruction manual. For a description of the 

connection method, see "Receiver and Servos 

Connection". 

Note: The channel assigned to each function 

can be checked at the Function menu of the 

Linkage Menu. 

i If the direction of operation of the servo 

is incorrecl, use the Reverse function of 

ihe linkage Menu. Also use Ihe swash APR 

function in other than ihe H-'; mode. 

• Adjust ihe direction of operation of ihe gyo. 

(Gyro side function) 

> Connect the throttle linkoge so that the 

carburetor con fuily close at full trim throttle 

cut. 

» Adjust the neutral oosition a! ihe linkage side 

and fine lune with ihe Sub-Trim function and 

End Point function. To protect the linkage, 

a fmit position can also be set with Ihe End 

Point funelion. 

. 1^2 

iflli. <0: «GYRO 40 

zELE +0: tPlT 40 

sTHR tO: ?G0U 40 

This function adjusts the throttle or pitch 

operation curve in relation to the movement of the 

throttle slick for each condition. 

• Swosh plate correction (fxcept H-l 

•If any infraction* rue noticed, for a deter 

<Throttle curve setting cxatnplo 

Activate the throttle curve of each condition with 

the condition select switch. 

•Normal curve adjustment 

Normal curve Creoles a basic: throttle curve 

centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted 

together with the pitch curve (Ncmol) so 'hot Ihe 

engine speed is constant any up/down control Is 

easiest. 

•Idle up curve adjustment 

The low side Ihrotile curve creates o curve 

matched for aerobatics llcop. ••oil. 3D. etc.). 

•Throttle hold curve adjustment 

Confirm -'hnt the role ol -he slowest position (0%} cl 

the stick -s 0% Ji'Vial setting). 

<K.xampk' tif'pilch curve .setting* 

Activate the pitch curve of each condition with 

the condition select switch. 

•Pitch curve (Normal) 

McWe the pitch at hovering approximately ~V'-6C 

Set the pitch ot hovering with the stic.'< posilion ol 

Ihe SD% point cs t.'ie 'JoncSar'J. 

•Stability ill hovering may he comketat to tiw throttle nine. 

AdiusUiKM is Cdsy hy using '.he hovering throttle funaion 

wd hovering |>itcli taction together. 

•Pitch curve (Idle up 1) 

The icie up 1 pi!ch C'.uve (unction creates a curve 

inelctied to o.rbwne f yht. 

Set to os standard. 

•Pitch curve (Idie up 2} 

Tne hi^h side pitch seltiny is fess ;h;:r, idle op i. 

The standard is -*8*. 

• Pitch curve (Hold) 

At outo rotation, use 'he maximum pitch ot fcoth 

!h<: nigh end low sides. 

(Pitch cr.gle setting example) 

Tnrottle hold: r 12° 
6. D/R function 

L)/R function is used io adjust ihe throw and 

operation curve of aileron, elevator and ntdder for 

each condition. 

•l-'or Oiruulv aikl cur.v soilings, refer n> tliu ,.loreI "Tlirni! 

This naily used after Luul Point has defined 

throw directions. 

CONDITION 

eon ICIUML _ 

/ 

7. Gyro sensitivity and nunle switching 

The gyro sensitivity and mode switching 

function is utilized to adjust the gyro mixing of the 

model, and can he set for each condition. 

Use this function when you want to suppress 

the torque generated by the changes in the pitch 

and speed of the main rotor during pitch operation. 

Adjust it so that the nose does not swing in ihe 

rudder direction. However, when using a heading 

hold gyro like those shown above, do not use Pitch 

to rudder mixing. 

Activate (lie Pitch to rudder (Pit -->RUD) mixing 

function from the Model Menu, and set (he curve 

for each condition. (At initial setting, this function 

is in ihe "INH" slate. To use it, set it to the "ON" 

suite.) 

<Settltt(i exam[»lc> 

Activate the mixing curve of each condition with 

the condition select switch. 

A curve setting example is shown below. 

• Pitch to RUD mixing curve (Normcll 

Use the hovering system or-ci set this curve to 

motel' lake off one' loridinj and vertical climb ot o 

constant speed. 

•Pilch to RUD mixing (Idle up 1) 

Use Uiis curve in stall turn, loop, end adjust it so 'he 

fuselage is facing straight ahead when heading 

Into Ihe w'nd. 

• Pitch to RUD mixing (Hold] 

This function is si;t so that the fuselage Is facing 

straight c'nead a' straight line auto rototion. The 

pitch of the tail rotor becomes neoily 0". 

9. Throttle hold .setting 

• Normal condition (hovering': Gyro sensitivity 

maximum 

• Idle up 1/idle uo 2/Throtlle hold: Gyro 

sensitivity minimum 

• However, during auto rotations with a taifdriven helicopter, this function may not hove 

ony effect on the 'nigh gyro sensitivity. 

8.Pitch tn KM) mixing .setting 

Note: When using a Futaba GY Gyro, or other 

heading hold gyro, this Pitch lo RUD mixing 

should not be used. The reaction torque Is 

corrected by the gyro. When operating the 

gyro in Ihe AVCS mode, Ihe mixed signal will 

cause neutral deviation symptoms and Ihe 

gyro wilt not operate normally. 

10. Throttle cut setting 

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the 

engine, by Hipping a switch with the throttle stick 

at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle 

to avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch's 

location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults 

to NULL 

•Willi ihw.llc slick a; idle, .uljusl liic «.uii position until uw 

engine cuiisisunilly shins off, h;u Utriullo linkage is not 

bi'tufing. 

11. Swash Mix corrects aileron, elevator and 

pitch interaction 

The swash mix function is used w cancel the 

swash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic) 

and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction 

corresponding to each operation of each condition. 

12. Throttle mixing setting 

•If ilirolll.' ruiMaji is ncti^sary lor a cmnpeiis.ilioii fur 

stowi:!)} of engine speed c.msv<t by swash jilaV operation 

HIKcVf'Vl.l: MIX iuiiclii'ii. 1 ' 

1.1. Oilier .special mixing* 

• Pitch to Needle mixing 

"his mixing is used with eng'nes v/ith o rieis^gn which 

allows needle control d^'inQ flight I'uel-o'r nVxt^re 

adjustment), A needle cu've con BE set. 

•Governor mixing 

This mixing is dedicuted governor ruling when o 

sjovemorisused. 

4$ h^ 

SYSTEM MENU 

The System Menu sets up functions of the 

transmitter: This does not set up any model data. 

• Coll ihe system menu shown below by 

touching the SYS button twice at the home 

screen, etc. 

[SYSTEM MIINU1 

by loucr. rg the 

Hon. Or a HOME/ 

SVSTEM MENU 

TRAINER : STRRT SEL. 

DISPLFLV ;RUTO LOCK 

USER NRME : INFO 

SOUND ;SBUS SERVO 

H/W SET : 

<SensoiTouchIM> 

• Select the function you wont io set and coll 

the setup screen by toucmng the RTN button. 

System Mciut functions (able 

[TRAINLR]: Starts and sets the trainer system. 

[DISPLAY]: LCD and back-light adjustment 

[USKR NAM I:}: User name registration 

|SOUND]: Turns olV the buzzer. 

[H/W Sl-.T): H/W reverse, calibration and stick mode , 

[START SILL..): Immediately, a model selection can be performed 

[AUTO LOCK.]: The automatic lock function of two kind;- of touch sensors 

[INK)]: Displays the program version. SD card information, product ID, and language selection. 

[SHUS SERVO J: S.fJUS servo setting. 

TRAINER Trainer system starting and setting 

TJ4SG trainer system makes it possible for the 

instructor to chose which channels and operation 

modes that can be used in the students transmitter. 

The function and rate of each channel can be 

set. the training method can also be matched to 

the student's skill level. Two transmitters must be 

connected by an optional Trainer Cord, and the 

Instructors' transmitter should be programmed for 

trainer operation, as described below. 

When the instructor activates the trainer switch, 

the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/ 

FUNC'NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor 

can make corrections while Ihe student has control). 

When the switch is released the Instructor regains 

control. This is very useful if the student gets the 

aircraft into an undesirable situation. 

• Selling data ore stored to model data. 

• Student fere con be adjusted al MIX/PUNC/ 

NORM mode. 

• Activated studenl channels can he selected 

by switches. 

NOTE: This trainer system can be used in the 

following manner; 

1. With the T14SG transmitter and a conventional 

transmitter, It the channel order Is different, 

it Is necessary to match the channel order 

before using this tunction. 

You can select the channel ol Input data 

from student's transmitter In the "FUNC" or 

"MIX" mode. 

2. When the TMSG Is used as fhe /nsfrucfor'i 

transmitter, jet the modulation mode of the 

student's transmitter to PPM. 

II being used as Ihe student, T14SG can be 

connected Io the instructor's transmitter which 

the PPM mode as the student's modulation 

mode is required. T14SG always sends PPM 

mode signal from the trainer jack. 

3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in 

both transmitters before flying. 

Coi i fsimnct/iia type* of tr smitrcrs and (miner HI 
• Select ITRAiNER] in (he System menu end enter the 

setup screen shown below py touching the RIM 

1/4 

INH MODE RATE STU.CH 

1 AIL OFF 

2ELE OFF 

3THR OFF 

4RUD OFF 

<SensofTouchTM> 

1. Move the cursor fc fhe (RATE) i-'em of fh<? 

chonnei you want to change ond "ouch the 

RTN button "o switch to the data input mode. 

2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

"RATE": Adjust the desiied rate. 

Selling range: 0-100% 

Initicl value: 100% 

•When yew wasu Ui remit the VJIUL- to the inuij| stjto. touch 

llie l(TN' hutloii for csc second. 

3. To end adjustment, touch the RTN button 

and return to the cursor mode. 

Mode and switch selection 

.Access the setup screen page 4 shown 

below by touching the SI taut ton three times. 

2. Move the cursor to the J ACT) or (12/8CHJ 

item and touch the RTN button to switch lo 

the data input mode. 

3. Select the mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN 

button to change the mode, |To teiminafe 

the mode change, fot/cn fhe 51 burton.} 

"ACT : Enable operation by cnanging lo (OFF) 

or [ON], 

"12/8 CH": When the student uses the T14SG. 

TMMZ. '\m, T12FG or FX-40. select [I2CH]. 

Otherwise select [SCH], 

II changing the trainer switch: 

•4. Move the cwsor lo the [SW] tJerr and touch 

the RTN button to access the switch setup 

screen. 

(See "Switch selection method" at the end of 

this manual to' selection method details.) 

Nole: The trainer function won't be turned 

on unless the Instructor's transmitter receives 

signals from the student's transmitter. Be 

sure to confirm this after connecting your 

trainer cabie. 

Operating mode selection 

(Setup screen page 1-3) 

Changing (lie student's channel 

1. Wove the cursor to the (MODE] item of the 

channel you want lo change and touch the 

RTN button to switch to the dota input mode. 

2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. The disptoy blinks. Touch the RTN 

button to change the mode. (To terminate 

fhe mode change, touch fhe S i buffon.} 

"MODE": Select the desired operation mode 

fof each channel. 

NORM: The model is av.i'jotled by signals from the student 

'Till! > ij above slh>« .fdic < lie! * 

when [MIX! or [R.NC] w 

1. Move the cursor lo the |STU. CHJ item of the 

channel you want to change and touch the 

RTN button to switch fo fhe data input mode. 

2. Select trio channel by scrolling the touch 

sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN 

button to r.honge the channel. (To terminate 

the mode change, touch the S • button.) 

"S1U. CM": Match the channel oroer of the 

Instructor's and student's transmitter. This 

function will help if both transmitters are in 

different modes, or the Master has a different 

wing type set up. The student con be set 

to match the Master without any physical 

changes being mode. 

"SW: Select the desire 

initial setting: SH 

i swilch. 

stiuiiij:. (Reset the student's model <Uta to the defj-jU 

conditio:)-) 

OFF: Only the instructor Mite oper.ues. 

Adjusting the student's rate. 

"This can be adjured for sun 

DISPLAY LCD and back-light adjustment, unit system 

LCD contrast, back-light brightness and backlight off-timer adjustment nre possible: 

Moreover, a display unit can be chosen from the 

metric system or yard/pound. 

i'Si'-'R NAMK- User name registration 

This function allows the modelers to change the 

T14SG user name. 

*A name of up to 10 ch-iracters he enured as ths user 

» Select jDlSPLAY] at the system menu end access 

the se-^up screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. 

BB02BKL 

CONTRAST 10 

BRIGHTNESS 10 

OFF TIMER OFF 

UNIT SVS. METRIC 

i Select [USSR NAME] ct the System menu and 

access fhe setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN button. 

User name fcondidatol 

! 

• Select the f: j -- c 11 rx i norr.< 

and te'iiift lo the Syster 

menu by toijcf.ir-.g lh< 

RTN button. Of th< 

HOME/EXIT button i 

iiwara;r:iiia_ 1/-3 

FUTflBR CO. flBCDEFGHIJ 

3--«; KLMNOPQRST 

CRNCEL lUUWXYZabcd 

ENTER : efgh i Jk lrin 

<r 4 jop^rStUUWX 

DELETE ;az ! 

<bensofTouch'" 

LCD contrast adjustment 

t. Select "CONTRAST" and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode and adjust 

the contras- by scrolling the touch sensor. 

"CONTRAST": Adjust the contrast to the 

desired value while watching the screen 

display. 

Setting range: (Lighter] 0 :o 15 (Dorket) 

Initial value: 5 

'When 

ie KTN b: :ond. 

2. Touch the 3TN button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

Hack-light brightness adjustment 

l.Se-lec- "BRIGHTNESS' and touch the RTN 

button to switch ;o the data input mode and 

adjust the back-light brightness by scrolling 

the touch sensor. 

"8RIGHTNESS': Adjust the brightness to the 

desired value while watching the screen 

display. 

Setting range: OFF, I to 20jLighter) 

Ini'ial value: 10 

w KIN Ituuun tVi/ • 

2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and 

return to 'he cursor mode. 

Back-light off-timer 

I. Select "OFF TIMER" and touch ihe RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode and adjust 

the back-light off-timer by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

"OFF TIMER": Adjust the lime when Ihe backlight turns off alter operofing the touch 

Setting range: 10 lo 240 sec [each 10 sec). 

OFF (olwoys on) 

Initial value: iO sec 

2. Touch the RTN button lo end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode, 

Unit system adjustment 

I.Select "UNIT SYS." end touch the RlN button 

to switch to the data input mode and adjust 

fhe unit by scrolling the touch sensor, 

Setting range: {METRIC) or {YARD/POUND) 

7. Touch the RTN button lo end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

User name rcgistrnti'gn 

1. Chonge Ihe user name as described below: 

[Moving cu 

Select {-)' 

in user name {candidote)! 

>}, onei touch (he RTN button. 

[Deleting a character) 

When [DELETE] is selected and the RlN button 

is touched, the character immediately after 

the cursor is deleted. 

(Adding a character] 

When a character is selected from the 

character list and the RTN button Is touched, 

that character is added at the position 

immediately afler Ihe cursor. 

*<\ name <.fyp to 10 ch;>r.i 

2. Upon completing the input, select [ENTER] 

ond touch the RTN button. (To terminote 

input and return to the original state, select 

[CANCEL] and touch Ihe RTN button.) 

(Character list I A3) 

w««iwa L3 

niTflftfl rn ' fiECOE^GH] I "IOK-WI-JKIKKCPCRST 

CRICEL :UWXV2abcd 

(Chciccter list 2/3) 

EUI8KLCC* 1

0

) ? j iCRHCEl. i<>=?2{ )"-• 

CIITCR Sf * •> 

(Chaiccterlisl 3/3) 

piiTOM i-i-i Eyieee-CBvi-^cwm 

cwtca. : 

EMTER :5KxSP 1 3 

<• + -.i'Mimrj" 

msiE... 
SOUND Turns off :he buzzer. S/W SETTING Hordwore reverse? ond stick mode 

The warning sound and other sounds of the 

T14SG transmitter can he turned oil'. 

•Whc:i "WARNINO" was sol io Ol-T, the im <i|^-ralu>:i alarm 

i Select [SOUND] o1 the system menu ond access 

the setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. 

• Sfcfeif.I fh» lum'.l c 

menu by :ouc': 

RTN button. 

HOME/EXIT bw 

msm 

TIMER ON 

WARNING ON 

TELEMETRV ON 

OTHER SOUND ON 

<SerisorTouch,w> 

H/W reverse 

This timet ion reverses the operation direction of 

the sticks, switches, trimmer levers, and knobs. 

Note: This setting reverses the actual operation 

signal, but does nat change the display 

Indicators. Use the Normal mode as long as 

there Is no special reason to use the Reverse 

mode. 

Stick muck' 

This function changes the slick mode of 

Note: This will not change the throttle ratchet, 

etc. Those ore mechonlcal changes that 

must be performed by a Fulaba service 

center. 

Note: Alter changing the mode, these changes 

are only applied to new models, it Is not 

applied to an existing model. 

Stick calibration 

J1-J4 stick correction con be performed. 

• Select l>i/W St;/ al the system menu arid access 

She setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. 

HA) REVERSE 

STICK MODE 

CALIBRATION 

On/olT operation 

1. Wove the cursor to the [TIMER] [WARNING] 

or [OTHER SOUND] item ond touch the RTN 

button to switch to the dotci input mode. 

2. Select the ON ot Off by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

'Tlii: iiispi.iv blinks. 

3.Touch the RTN button. 

Operation direction reversal method 

i. Select [H/W REVERSE) ond access the setup 

screen shown below by touching the RTN 

button. 

Changing slick mode 

uHORN saHORH SEHORH 

12IIORH seflOKH SFNORH 

SCMORK SC WORM 

»DHORM SMNORH 

! .Select [STICK MODE) end access the setup 

screen shown below by touching the SIN 

button. 

2. Move the cursor to I'ne item corresponding 

io the H/W (hardware) you want to reverse 

one' touch the R'fN button lo switch lo the 

data input mode. 

3. Select the mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. The deploy blinks. When the RTN 

button is touched, the operation direction ;s 

reversed. (To terminate the mode change, 

touch th6 SI button.) 

"NORM": Normal operation direction 

"REV ; Operation diiection is reversed. 

2. Move the cursor to the "STICK MODE" item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data input mode. 

3. Select Ihe mode. The display blinks. When 

the RTN button is touched. Ihe slick mode is 

Changed. (To 'errninale the mode change, 

touch the S! button.) 

56 

Stick calibration method 

"J.'i and M co/rminn is cicserihoil tiolnvv JI and J2 

I .Select [CALIBRATION! and access rhe selup 

screen shown below by touching the RTN 

button. 

... 

l-il 

J3 J4 JI-.J2 

3.Move ihe J3 or J4 sticks to the neutrol posMc 

and press the RTN button for one second. 

4.Set the J3 and J4 sticks fully to the bottom 

right and wait until the buzzer sounds. 

j.SsI the J3 end J4 sticks fully Io the top left and 

wait until the buzzer sounds. 

6.The above completes the correclio 

operation. Operate and check it stir 

correction v/as performed normally. 

START SKI... Immediately, a model selection con be performed 

START SKI. is a function which siarts and can 

perform a mode! selection immediately. 

Each lime, it is convenient for the modeler 

which is enjoying two or more models by one of a 

transmitter. 

Quick Select Screen ' 

As the name suggests, the Quick Mode! Select 

Function enables the modeler io change (he 

selected models rapidly each lime the transmitter is 

turned ON. With a few quick touches, it is possible 

to change models whereas before it would require 

:i rnulfi-step process. The T14SG stores up to four 

models in the Quick Select offerings. 

Model Select Screen 

When Ihe transmitter is turned 011, it will open to 

the Model Selection Screen immediately. 

STfiRT SEL. 

MODE OFF 

Setting Up and Adjusting the Quick Select Models 

1. The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu is 

accessed through the TI4SG System Menu. 

Turn the transmitter ON arid then press the 

SYS (Systeml button two times. Use the 

SensorTouchTM Io highliqh! Ihe Star; Selection 

(START SEL.) end Ihen press Ihe Return (RTN) 

button to confirm the selection. 

atlOFF I 

2.The Start Selection (START sEL.) menu option 

defaults to OFF meaning that Quick Select 

and Model Select ore not applicable. To 

activate the Gujck Select or Model Select, 

use the Sensoriouch "o scroll Io the OFF 

setting as denoted in ihe image. With the 

Off indication highlighted, press the Return 

{RTN) butlon and rotate the SensorTouch once 

again fo scroll amongst Ihe options. Wlln f'ie 

Quick Select (QUICK SEL.) indicated, press Ihe 

Return (RTN) button once again to make the 

desked selection as indicated. 

aclivatt additional options available 

for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model). 

These options determine i[?when the Quick Select 

information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS, 

as the name suggests, indicates that each lime 

ihe transmitter is powered-up. the Quick Select 

information will appear on-screen. The MDL 

(Mode!) setting indicates thai the Quick Select 

information will appear on-screen only when 

the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the 

transmitter is turned ON. With ihe Quick Select 

mode highlighted, use the SensorTouch fo move lo 

the activation selling options. Model (MDL) is (he 

default selling. Press the Return (RTN) billion to 

bring forth the options, then scroll lo the ALWAYS 

setting using the SensorTouch pud. Press the Return 

(RTN) button once again lo finalize the selection. 

cCUJCX sft-ESSaE 

Quick Select Activation: 

With the Quick Select (QUICK. SJ-.L.) option 
Assigning models lo the sensor buttons; 

There are Tour sensors/buttons that correspond 

wii)> ibe SuJisorToiicJi: Link (LNK), .Model LMDL) 

System (SYS) ;ind SI. As such, it is possible (o offer 

up to four models available through the Quick Select 

function. We suggest using the models that you fly 

mosi often. 

1.Use Ihe SensorTouch. scroll to the desired 

sensor/button for the first model: for example. 

Link (INK). 

2. With the input next to the desired sensor 

highlighted, press the Return |RTN) button one 

lime. 

3. Using the SensorTouch, scroll through the 

available models. To select the desired 

model, press 'he Return {RTN) button. 

<t. Repeat as desired for the remoining sensors. 

Model Select Screen 

ucos QUICK S£L. I 

Using the sensors to select the model: 

1. Turn ON the ticmsmilti r u tiv tir g the 

Quick Select screen, if Model (MDL) has 

been selected, please be sure to press the 

Model (MDL) sensor when powering up the 

transmitter. 

This allows the Model Select screen to be 

immediately upon turning ON the transmitter. 

M'lu.isc nolo: this fundio:t c.mno! lv utilized die shnx' lime 

ai ilie Quick Select function. If nmre lhan lour models ;iro 

llowii ivgutarly, We ih.U tl;e Mode! Select Uincliuii be 

utilized AS it will save linn; wliea vlcolini; Ihc.k.ired ...rer-jft 

If lour, or lov-v, hhkU'U a>e Ikwn, ;hc Quid' Select o|«irm 

wouM he the (sevc choice. 

M'LC.tse nolo: the Mode! Select function <U>s IK>: .dhw (,.xo,s 

U. the COI>V or Df.l.rTi: options. To utilize i>:w 

'He typical' manner .s.U'iihed m U,e complete instruction 

I.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu is 

accessed through the TMSG's System Menu. 

Turn the tiansmittef ON and then press the 

SYS (System) button two times. Use the 

SensorTouchVM to highlight the Start Selection 

(START SEL.) and ihen press the Return /RTN) 

burton to confirm the selection. 

2. The Slort Selection (START SEL.) menu ootion 

defaults to OFF meoning thai Quick Select 

and Model Select ere not applicable. i'o 

activate the Quick Select or Model Select, use 

the SensorTouch lo scroti to the OFF setting as 

denoted in the Image. With the OFF indication 

highlighted, press the Return (RTN) button and 

rotate Ibe SensorTouch once agoin to scroll 

to the Model Select (MODEL SEL). Press ihe 

Return (RTN) button once again to activate 

Model Select as indicated. 

OS wlnl Mill u K|U Ml U>eRem.(RTN)t,ultoi 

2. To select the mocel assigned to a particular 

sensor, douDle-click the desired sensor. For 

example, MODEL- 03 is assigned to SI, doubleclick SI to bring forlh all settings, etc, tor Model 

-03. The T14SG offers on audible and visual 

confirmation as the selected model memory is 

changed accordingly. 

*iftlic Hc.ar.iJRT!\) hi/Uo.i is (/wuble-Wie.-e.i, the TJ4.SG ins 

Model Select Activation: 

With the Model Select tMODLI, SKI...) option 

activated, there are two additional options available 

for customization: ALWAYS nnd MDL (Model). 

These options determine if'when the Model Select 

information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS, 

as the name suggests, indicates that each time 

the transmitter is poweied-up, the Model Select 

information will appear on-screen. The MDL 

(Model) setting indicates that the Model Select 

information will appear on-screen only wficn 

the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the 

transmitter is turned ON. 

With the Mode! Select mode highlighted, use the 

SensorTouch to move to the activation setting 

options. Model (MDL) is the default selling. Press 

the Return (RTN) button to bring forth the options, 

then scroll to the ALWAYS setting using the 

SensorTouch pad. Press the Return (RTN) button 

once again to finalize the selection. 

IE GUICK SEuGSGSSH 

Using the Model Select 1-unctum: 

1.Turn ON the transmitter, activating t'ne 

Model Select screen. If Model (MDL) has 

been selected, please be sure lo press Ihe 

Model (MDL) sensor wi-.en powering up the 

transmitter. 

•I'liNKc note: liven ifilie Model Select tunctinn is active, the 

Power Mode screen will api-car wlien the inuisimtier is tuwd 

ON white simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) bxlon. 

2. The SensorTouch is used to select amongst 

the on-screen models. The current mode! 

wilt automatically be highlighted when 'he 

transmitter is turned ON. If o different model is 

desi'ed. use the SensorTouch lo sciol! through 

the available options; each highlighted 

accordingly. Again, to select a model, 

press the Return (RTN) bullon accordingly. 

The T14SG offers an audible and visuof 

confirmation as the selected model memory is 

changed. 

2HOOEL-62 

3HODEL-0J 

4110061.-04 

sKOOEL-eS 

AUTO LOCK The automatic lock 'unction of two kinds of SensorTouch 

The Auto Lock function makes it possible to lock 

ihe transmitter to prevent any unwanted input from 

your hands while flying. 

The auto lock function can be set in two ways. 

LOCK TIMER 

Auto Lock functions automatically when there is 

no operation from the HOMH screen display for a 

chosen number of seconds. 

START LOCK 

Auto Lock functions automatically when the 

mode! changes or power is lumed on. 

•To temporarily allow access to the T1«SG programming 

i Manual lock 

f HOME/EXIT hullo- is ic-uchcd 1 

eccncl o; nvj'e fr-n a HOME scree 

i SensorTouch locks minimally. 

menu by :o<K 

RIN b'jilon. 

HOME/EXII t 

LOCK TIMER OFF 

START LOCK OFF 

.Open ihe Auto lock screen in Ihe systen 

menu. 

fBWITOI iz: 

P. Adjust the ochvouon iirner !oi the Auto 

Lock function. Tne Timer will becvn counting 

immediately when the HOME screen :s not 

used. The inner is aujusiaDie m one second 

increments up lo 30 seconds. If the timer 

value is OFF. this function is not applicable. 

fiiiT6'T6tfe'"" 

3.Tne Start LOCK setting will, if enobled, 

automatically iocs tne : i4oG when the 

transmitter is powered up. To allow access to 

• he transmitter's functions, press and hold the 

SI key for one second. 

• Manual lock 

if SI b'.m&n is touched 1 seuv-d 

or tcoie fiorn s HOME s-ieen, = 

SensorTouch locks -•,3riu2tly. 

<SensorTouch'M> 

• Lock release 

fverylockfunction s touch (1 second 

oi morel of SI b.f (>•• will release the 

lock. 

• Lock release 

livery lock ftin::ion itouch [1 ssconri 

or more j cf HOME/EXIT culton v„!l 

release the lock 

• Display of a lock 

I! locked,thee will t;e so vind met tr.e 

icon of a key w:li ccn-.t- a. 

"\ 

FUTRBR CO. Mli194?.3M 

HSTl 00:00.0®/ 

ST2 00:00.tf?' 

©MULT sf MODhLl 

+G 13 00:00 +r3 

+o +0 

Displays the program version. SD card information, and product ID. 

The T14SG system program version information, 

SD card information (current and maximum 

number of model data and other files), ami product 

ID are displayed on the Informalion screen. 

•When ibe SO card is no: inserted, the SD card information is 

• Select (iNPOj at -he system menu and access the 

setup screen shown below by touching the RTN 

The language displayed in home, menu, and 

setup screen is selectable. 

-Rirars 

on nuir.e PRODUCT 012050002 

.'hC RF IO 122920001 

un'on'u LRNGURGE ENGLISH 

VERSION 0.4 

RRER JAPAN 

CARD SIZE 8/3766 

<SensofTouchTM> 

"PRODUCT": Product ID number 

"«F ID": RFID number 

"LANGUAGE": The language used in T '• <iSG 

"VERSION": T14SG system progrcm version 

information 

"AREA": Area which can use TWSG 

"CARD SI2E": Current/Maximum number of 

model data and other files |SD card) 

Language selcclio 

1.Move the cursor to Ihe "LANGUAGE' item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data input mode. 

2. Change the language by scrolling Ihe touch 

sensor. The display blinks. When the RTN 

button is iouched. the longuoge is changed. 

(!o terminate the change, turn the EDI1 dial 

or push the SI button.) 

<OI:I

:

). IH 

•Iflhe !.<> 

A Danger 

O H is recommended to Lock the 

SensorTouch during riight, to prevent 

any accidenla! touches which could 

change settings and cause an accident. 
SB US SIvR VO SBUS servo selling. 

An S.BUS servo can memorise the channel 

and various sellings you inpui. Servo belling 

can be performed on (lie T14SO screen by 

wiring the servo as shown in the figure. 

• Select [SOUND] o! the system menu csnd access 

the setup screen shown below by touching Ihe 

RTN button. 

menu by 

RTN b-Jlton. ^ 

HOME/EXIT BE 

1/3 

TRAVEL 100.0 

NEUTRAL + 

DEfiDBflND 

SPEED INH 

S.3US/S.3US2 

Scivo 

<jensorTouch'"> 

Servo ID number 

Individual ID numbers are memorized for vour 

S.BUS(2) servos in yourH4Su. When it servo is 

used, the servo 1!) number is automatically read by 

the transmitter. If you use multiple S.BUS(2) servos 

and do not want to change she sellings on all ihat are 

mounted in a fuselage, only ihe desired servo in the 

group can be set by entering the iD of tlial specific 

servo. 

• SW70SH tunnol t>c -irt^i^xl by THSCi. 

* Willi some S.UUSI2) sorvos. tiioic are souk- fuiictnms with 

(Only the fun 

Procedure for changing S.BUS servo .setting 

I. Select [SBUS SERVQ| of the System Menu. 

7. Wire the servo as shown in the figure above. 

3. Piess {RECALL) on page 3(S1 is pushed twice). 

The ID end current setting of thai servo ore 

displayed. ([RECALL) is chosen =* RTN is 

pushed RTN is pushed for 1 second) 

4. When multiple servo* are connected change 

[INH) at the right side of the ID number on the 

screen fo [ACT] and enter (he ID o' fhe servo 

you want lo set. 

5. Set each item. (Please see the next pege.) 

6. Press [WRITE] on poge 3{[WR|TE) is 

chosen RTN is pushed -r< R1N h pushed for I 

second). The sellings ore changed. 

64 • of S 

Push (INIT.J, if you would lifce to initialize c 

setup of a servo. ([iNIT.] is chosen "> RTN i: 

pushed • > RTN is pushed for' second) 

S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter 

a (miction which c. ci according to tho Kind of si 

o whose parameters are to be 'nact. It cannot bfi changed. 

o. Always assign a channel before use. 

• ID 

Displays tho ID ot (he si 

• Channel 

Channel of the S.BUS syslem assigned to the s» 

• Reverse 

The direction in which (hn scvo rotates can bn changed. 

• Servo type 

When "Retractable" Is selected and the servo has been continuously stopped tor 30 seconds, ihe oeaa band 

expands and unnecessary hold current due lo external lorco is eliminated When a new control signal enters, 

normaf operation is resumed. When using dm servo as a landing gear servo, select 'R^tradable". Also aojusl Ihe 

servo t'avel to match the landing gear movement range. 

• Soft Start 

Restricts operalion in the specifieo direction ihe in 

movement when Ihe power is htrtmo on slowly mc 

• Stop Mode 

The slate of Ihe scvo when the servo inpui signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold* mode setting holds the 

servo in iis fast commanded position even if using AM or FM syslem. 

• Smoother 

This tunction changes smoothness ot the servo operation relative k 

used tor normal flight. Select the 'OFF' mode when quick operalion i 

• Neutral Offset 

n be changed. When the neutral offset is e vafuo. ti 

changes. Smooth selling is 

as 3D. 

's range of travel is restricted 

can be matched withoi 

to'que. 

• Speed Control 

Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple 

feeing affected by motor fluctuations. This is eHeclive lor loud torques below Ihe 

Nov,'ever, note that the maximum speed will not be exceed whal the servo is capable ol even if Ihe 

ope rating voltage is increased. 

• Dead band 

The dead band angle at slopping can be specified. 

[Relationship between dead band sel value and servo operation} 

Smnll •••> Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal change. 

Large •••» Dead band angle is large and (he servo does noi operate, at smart signal changes. 

• Travel Adjust 

The lefl and right travels c< 

• Boost 

o will operate continuously and the o 

e neutral position con be set independently. 

enl applied' to the internal motor when starting the servo can be sel. Since 

not star! the motor, it essentially fee's i:ke the dead band was expanded. The molor can tie imn 

adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor. 

(Relationship between boost set value and servo operalion] 

Smnll •••> Motor reacts to a minute current and operalion becomes smooth. 

Large •••» InitiV?/ 'esponse improves and output torque increases. Hotvevw, il ihe lo'rjue is loo I 

i small travel does 

become rough. 

--•iii 

• Boost ON/OFF 

OFF : if is Ihe boost ON al ttte lime of low-speed operalion.(ln Ihe o: 

ON . II is always the boosl ON.(When quick operation is hope) 

• Damper 

The cha'acteristic when the servo is stopped can be sel. 

Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, elc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur, 

depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause Ihe servo lo ostillate) occurs even though tho 

Dead Band, Slretc.hor, Boosl and other parameters are suitable, aojusl this parameter lo a value Uvgcr than the 

initial value. 

(Relationship between damper set value and servo operation] 

Small • When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur, 

Large • When you want lo operate so that braking is nol applied. However, il will feel like Ihe servo response has 

n the s o Ihe target position 

This is used when slopping hunting, etc., but tho holding characlerisiicdtanges as shown below. 

(Relationship between stretcher and servo operation] 

Small -> Servo holding force becomes weaker. 

Large -> Se'yo holding force bc-comes st-onger. 

(Note) When this parameter is large, Ihe currenl consumption inceases. 

• Buzzer 

ter is taken out previously, a bu2zer unlil Ihe signal ol a s> 

ismilter has been turneu OFF ahead of a servo power supply • Tho biuret souno of about 1.25 Hz 

:!i sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm. 

(Do not insert or remove the s 

by incorrect recognition.) 

* Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the ir 

o connector white the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may sound 

)t operate Ihe number more than needed o 

UNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU 

The Linkage Menu in made up of functions 

which perform model addition, model type 

selection, system type, end point setting, and other 

model basic sellings. 

• Access the Linkoge menu shown below by 

topping ihe LNK button two times. 

The funclions which can be selected depend on 

ihe model type. A typical menu screen is shown 

below. 

• Sekid ihe function you want fo so' ana' coif 

the- setup screen by touching the RTN button. 

Linkage Menu (unctions table 

(SKRVOJ: Displays the servo test and operation position 

[MODEL SHL): Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting 

[MODBLTYPK]: Model type, wing type, swash type, etc. selection 

[SYSTEM): System mode selection, link of a transniilter and receiver, area mode 

[FUNCTION): Channel assignment of each function can be changed 

[SUB-TRIM j: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo 

[REVERSE]: Reverses the servo travel direction 

[FAIL. SAFE}: Fail safe function and balfcry fail sate function selling 

[END POINT): Servo travel adjustment and limit selling 

[SERVO SPEED): Speed setup of a servo 

[THR CUT]: Slops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only) 

[IDLE DOWN]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine (airplane only) 

ISWASI1 RTNG]: Limits lite swasti plate travel to within a lixcd range, (helicopter 

[SWASH]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only) 

[TI-7'4 SH'f. j: Control step amount and mode seieciion u/'iliedigiial trim 

[WARNING]: Mixing warning normal reset 

[TELEMETRY]: Displays various data senl from the receiver. 

[SENSOR): Various telemetry sensors setting 

[DATA RESET]: Model memory set dala resel 

* ' ui.cUr.i.', <7TT 
• RVO \| {)I'f'OR Se,vo 

^

esl GraPi

'

1 Display / Displays servo positions. 

1 

MODI'J.SEIJ-X. 

This is used for testing servo movement. 

"Moving Test" (repetition mode) anil "Neutral 

Test" (.fixed position mode) are available. 

The "Neutrai Test" is good for finding the 

neutral position of ;i servo hom. 

to prevent any potential difficulties, 

the servo test function will he inoperable, or 

inaccessible, under certain conditions. Specifically, 

the Servo Test function is not operational if the 

Throttle Cut is ON in cither airplane or helicopter 

modes; or if the Throttle Hold is ON in Helicopter 

mode. 

.] button is pushed once from a 

» Select (SERVO) in the Linkage menu and access 

the setup screen shown below by touching ihe 

RTN bulton. 

Servo te.sl operation 

!, Move the cursor to the |OFF] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch lo the data input 

mode. 

Select the test mode by scrolling ihe touch 

sensor end touch 1he RTN button. The display 

blinks. Touch the RTN butlon lo change the 

mode. (To terminate mode change, touch 

the SI button,j 

[MOVING]: Mode which lepeots operation of 

each servo 

[NEUTRAL]: Moce wlVch locks each servo in 

the neutral position 

2. Move Ihe cursor to the {MOVING] or 

[NEUTRAL] item ond touch- the RTN button to 

swilch to the data input mode. 

Select the [OFFJ by scrolling the touch sensor 

and touch the RTN button. Tesling is stopped. 

The Model Selection function performs moce! aadition, selection, 

deletion, copy, ond model name selling. 

This function is used to loud the settings of the 

desired model into the T14SG's menwry. 

The settings may be selected from either the 

transmitter's internal memory or nil SD card. 

Remember thai up to 30 model memories are available 

in the transmitter. 

The name of the model stomd in the transmitter and 

the SD card may be changed. This can be very useful 

to tell dillorent models sellings apart, liich model name 

can be as long as 10 characters, and the model name 

always appears in the display scteen. 

The Copy function is used to copy parameters, 

sellings, etc. from one model data into a second 

memory. It may be used for getting a head-start on 

setting up models with almost the same settings (only 

diftei'onee.s need to Iw modified, instead of entering the 

complete model (torn scratch). Also, this function may 

be used lo make a backup copy of'a model seiup before 

any clumges are made. 

•T'MSti CJI1 i:>o -.he model d.ita of TXV'C'iS fur SI) caul, 

o,|>yiii|; it. Hmvcver, liic mode! .fatj off MSti cannot he 

used hyTSSCJ IS). 

i Select (MODEL SELECT) in the linkage menu 

and access Ihe setup screen shewn below by 

touching the RTN button. 

-MODEL SEL. MODEL-01 

TX HiMMCMI 

NEW 

Model selection 

•Mn,I I D.ITA S 

minl'I currently used can lx- selected. 

1. Move the cursor to the sove destination 

display {'TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Selec' the save destination by scrolling the 

touch sensor and touch Ihe RTN button. 

(TX): Transmitter memory 

[CARD]: SD card 

2. Alter moving Ihe cursor to the desi'ed model 

in the model list, touch Ihe RTN button. 

3. Move to {SELECT}. 

4.touch the RTN button. A confirmation 

message is displayed. Touch the RTN button 

tor one second arid selection is complete. 

Model addition 

1. Move the cursor to [NEW], 

2.Touch the RTN button. A confirmation 

message appears. Touch the RTN bulton for 

one second. 

*1he model type setup 

ami SYSTEM mode. 

*IJnk is required when a new model is 

made from a model selection. 

Model deletion 

, Move ihe cursor to the save destination 

display {'"TX" or ' CARD") and touch the RTN 

butlon to switch lo ihe dale incut mode. 

(TX): Transmitter memory 

[CARD): SD card 

2. Move the cursot to the model you wont to 

delete in Ihe model list ond then touch the 

RTN butlon. 

3. Move the cursor !o (DELETE). 

4. Touch the RTN buhon. When a confirmation 

message is displayed and the RTN button 

is touched for one second. Ihe model is 

deleted. 

Model name change 

Lf HNRSI I -ABCOEFGH]3 QOKLl ;KLHfW0S5T 

ENTER I «F«HI INN 

DELETE 

[Adding a chorocter) 

When o character is selected from the 

character list ond the RTN button is touched, 

that character is added at the position 

immediately after the cursor. 

"A name of tip to 10 character* luny can he ci:u-;eil us die 

model lurre. (A space is also counted as one vliaratler.) 

6. After the desired information has been input, 

select (ENTER) and touch the RTN button. 

Ilo terminate input and return to the original 

state, select [CANCEL) and touch ihe RTN 

button.) 

1. If changing the location: 

Move the cursor to the sove destination 

display ("TX'' or "CARD") arid touch fhe RTN 

button to swilch lo the dote input mode. 

Select the save destination by scrolling the 

touch sensor and touch the RTN button. 

[TX]: Transmitter memory 

(CARD): SD cord 

2. Move the cutsor to the model you want to 

change in the model lisl and Ihen touch the 

RTN bulton. 

3. Move to [RENAME;. 

A. Touch the RTN buMon. 

•Tlie model waive setup screen is displayed. 

UI.tid.K0) 

j as described 

(Moving cursor in the user name (candidate)) 

Select [«-] or •[-.], and touch the RTN button. 

[Deleting a character} 

When fOKLi: !£•) is selected arid the RVN butlon 

is touched, thtj character immediately after 

the cursor is deieled. 

Model copy 

"v\ copy < II (A' 17 ike ii IEL S: 

1. if changing the location' 

Move the cursor to the save destination 

display {TX" oi "CARD') and touch Ihe RTN 

button tc switch to the data input mode. 

Select Ihe scve destination by scrolling the 

touch sensor and touch Ihe RTN butlon. 

• TX): Transmitter memory 

[CARD): SD card 

'?.. Select the model you want to copy in -he 

model list ond then touch the RTN butlon. 

3. Move to {COPY). 

4. Touch Ihe RTN button. 

5. If replacing the model stored in the 

transmitter memory: 

Move to [AQD-LIS?! and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode. 

Select fhe destination model by scrolling the 

touch sensor and touch the RTN button. 

;ADD-LISi): adding the model to the list 

[{model nome)]: replacing the model 

• t in- model stored in the SD card c.i:i ho rep!.u-,xl 

If changing the location: 

Move the cursor to Ihe copy destination 

display ("TX" or "CARD') and touch Ihe RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Select the save destination by scrolling the 

touch sensor and touch Ihe RfN button. 

6. Move to [COPY). 

7. Touch the RTN button. When a corifiimal;on 

message is disployed ana Ihe RTN button is 

touched for ore second, *he model dcla is 

copied. 

MODK I, TVPE This function 

and glider. 

sfeefs fhe model type from among airplane, helicopter, 

Six swash types are available for helicopters. 

Six types of main wings and three types of tail 

wings are available for airplanes and gliders. 

Functions and mixing functions necessary for each 

model type are set in advance at (lie factory. 

Note: The Model Type function automatically 

selects the appropriate output channels, 

control functions, and mixing functions for the 

chosen model type. 

When the Model Type selection command 

Is accessed, all of the data In the active 

memory Is cleared (except the following 

swash type.) Be sure thai you don't mind 

losing Ihls data, or back It up to another 

memory using the copying functions. 

When changing the helicopter swash type 

within the following groups, you can leave 

the sellings other than the SWASH function. 

However, this is Initialized when you change 

the swash type to the other swash type 

group. ( - 1 

Swash type group A; 

H-l.H-3, HR3. and HE3 

Swash type group B: 

H-4. H-4X 

• Select [MODEL TYPE] in the Linkcge menu and 

access ihe setup screen snown below by touching 

the RTN button 

3M0DEL 

TVPE FlIRPLflNE 

WING NORMAL 

lfllL 

TAIL N0RMRL 

("fhe di'.pUy scree: 

screen depends oi 

example. Tl>i! 

odd iype.) 

Model type selection 

1. Move the cursor to the item you want to 

change and touch the RTN tsutton to switch 

to Ihe data input mode. 

Select the desired type by scrolling the 

louch sensor and touch Ihe RTN button. A 

confirmation message appears. Touch the 

RTN button for one second. 

M.ove to [YHS| and Touch Ihe RTN button for 

one second 

(To terminate input and return lo Ihe original 

stole, touch the S1 butlon or select [NO) and 

touch the RTrJ bulron.) 

"TYPE": Model type 

"WING" (airplane/glider): V^ing type 

"TAIL" (orpiane/glider): Tail type 

'SWASH ' (helicopter): Swash type 

2. If resetting the doto ' 

helicopter swosh lype: 

/hen chcnging the 

(Heli or) 

Move ihe cursor to [Of-'PJ end touch the RVN 

butlon to switch to the acta input mocks. 

Select [ON) by scrolling the touch sensor 

and toucn the RTN butlon. A confirmation 

niessage appears. Touch the RTN button. 

Activate the swash type setting. The swash 

setting parameters are reset. 

'SI types * 

70 
Model type selection (Airplane, Glider) SYSTEM System mods setting. Receiver link 

• WitiK type (Nnrn 

2 AIL + 2 FIP 2 AIL + 4 FLP 

AJLrLP I FLM\ ML2 

•Wing type (Tailless wing) 

Flying wing /') 

•Tall type 

NORMAL /Tv 

fi4fes> PIC 

Model type selection (Helicopter) 

System Type selection 

The T14SG is for 2.4GHz only. The system 

can be changed from among 5 choices: FASSTcsi 

14CH, FASSTest I2C'H, FASST MULT1, 

FASST 7CH, S-FHSS. Il is FASSTest 14CH unci 

FASSTesil2CH which can be chosen by R7(K)8SH 

set. The method of selection is to the next pstge. 

(Yes; ; Sukciion sols the channel order suiutik- fur System 

IV>V loitniimoml here.) 

[No]. 'Die p:.s«H cii.uuu'l orcfer is ii:;ih>'ji:icd 

•After iisiv reiimulw to les; ihu I'.nxlcl aid simulit 

fully cliJck soivo .iircclion ami motion. 

•Aiutna servos cannot he used wiih Ihe 1(~(U)SS]S in tliv 

l)ii;il receiver function (only FASSTest I4CH 

mode) 

Dual receivers can he linked with the T14SG. 

Two receivers are recognized individually by ID 

numbers. For example, in R700XSB, CH output 

selling function is used, by selling ihe first as as 

"l-SCH", and setting (he second as- "9-I4CH", (wo 

sets of receivers can be used as a set in the mode!, 

allowing you 14 channels, if a Dual receiver 

function is used, the following function can set up 

individually. 

• Battery fail-safe voltage setup 

• Telemetry function ON/OFF 

• Sensor setup 

• Select (SYSTEM) in the Linkage n 

shown below by touching the 

:mam 

FflSSTest-14CH SINGLEG 

f~~~~i7F~s 

LINK 3,3V 

: <»eniorTooch-

"> 

TELEMETRV 

flUT DL. 1.0S 

Area mode selection (Frc(|tU'iii'v rstimei 

The T14SG transmitter led to 

function in many counuies. u you win oe utilizing 

this transmitter in a country other than France, 

please make sure that [ARKAj is set to "G". If, 

however, ihis transmitter will be utilized in France, 

it must be set to "F" in order to comply wiih French 

regulations.FASST mode selection 

Receiver linking 

The receiver will only be controlled (without 

being affected by oilier Iransmitiers) by the 

transmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver 

other than one purchased as a set, linking is 

necessaiy. 

Moreover, a re-link is required when a new 

model is added by model selection, and ihe lime of 

system type change. Li„, kin|„,cthoa o$> 

Cases when linking Is rtecessaty: 

• When u;:^9 o receiver o!t>or than the "nli.ol seeing. 

• When lh« communication system was changed. 

|PASSr<?$H4CH "ASSTestl2CH ate.) 

• When a new model was erected by model 

selection. 

Battery Tail-safe voltage setup (only FASSTest 

mode) 

The voltage which battery fail-safe activates, 

can he set when you link. (_v5-S.4V) The receiver 

memorizes ihe setting as il was at link. 

Suggested selling voltages are as follows. 

• 4 cells NiCd or NiMH (Normal: 4,8v) - 3.8 v 

• 2 colls Life (Normal: 6.6 v) - 6.0 ~ 6.2 v 

• 2 cells l.iPo (Normal: 7.4 v) = 7.2 - 7.4 v 

li is a rough reference value. 

Since il changes wiih servos carried in the 

condilion and ihe model of a batter)', please set to 

your own model in a battery consumption current. 

lik.i;- 73 

Telemetry function (FASSTest mode only) 

To use the telemetry function, set '"Telemetry" 

to-ACT". 

DL Interval (FASSTest mode only) 

When a telemetry function is enabled, the 

receiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor 

daia can be changed. 

If a DL interval is increased, the response of 

the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick 

response will improve. 

System Type selection procedure 

I. Move the cursor to ihe [FASSTest-i4CH) 

item and touch the RIN button to switch to 

the cici?a input mode. 

2. Select the lystam type by scrolling ftte 

touch sensor. 

|i-ASSIesl-UCH][fASSTesl-;2CH]|f-ASSTMUL"!)1FASST-7CH] [S-PHSSJ 

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest I4CH 

mode) procedure 

t. Move the cursor lo the ;SINGIE;] il err; cine 

touch Ihe RTN button to switch to the date 

input mode. 

FflSST»«t-HCHMHWMfi 

2. Select the (SINGLE) or [DUAL; by scrolling 

the touch sensor. 

:i Primary 

u displays. 

FRSSTCSI-HCHSS 

LfNK f.'eu* I-IKK 

iU 

In DUAL, a primary receiver is link prev 

No:t, a secondary receiver Is link. 

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

Area mode selection (Frequency ranye) 

procedure 

i. Move the cursor to the |G) item end touch 

the RTN button to switch lo the data input 

mode. 

2. Select the |G]or(r] by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

*"F" is clioscn vinly when using tin; IriiiiiiiiiUer is used in 

Prjncc. Leave Ihis in "C." otlienvi*.-, 

3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

Telemetry ACT/INH procedure 

I. Move Ihe cursor lo the TELEMETRY [ACT) item 

and touch Ihe RTN bulton lo switch lo the 

data input mode. 

1-14CH SINGLEG 

2. Select the {ACT|or;INH) by scrolling the louch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN bulton to end adjustment and 

return to 'lie cursor mode. 

DL Interval set procedure 

1. Move Ihe cursoi to Ihe TELEMETRY DL[!.Q$| 

item ones" touch the RTN button to switch lo 

the data input mode. 

TV 

ID of o Seconder/ 

receiver displays. 

FftSSTest-MCH $l>Cl£G 

5. SO* 

2. Selecl Iho Di time by scroJIing the louch 

sensor. If o DL interval is increased, the 

response of the sensor data disploy becomes 

slower, but stick response will improve. 

Initial value: 1 .Os 

Adjustment range ; 0.1 s—2.0s 

3. Touch Ihe RTN button lo end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

The example fur choosing System Type 

-Rassor speed h« 

piiori'.y over nu'iiber 

ot clism • ols 

-Tohmr •iy K-(|uiies 

only tnc • current 

' receiver battery 

-Wan: tc use more channels 

-Want lovse a Irgc m-mba 

of telemetry functions / 

FASSTest 14CH 

R7008SS 

R7003SB 

R7008SB 

R7003SB 

—[HI] 

-Want ;o use i 

-Want to use a 

previously ussa 

receiver as Is 

FASST 7CH 

FASSTMULTI 

FASSTest 12CH R606FS 

R6008HS 

R6108SB 

R6208SB 

R6014HS 

R6014FS 

R6203SB 

R6203SBE 

R6202SBW 

R6303SB 

R6303SBE 

R617FS 

R6004FF 

R616FFM 

R6106HF 

R6106HFC 

R6203S8 

R6203SBE 

R6202SBW 

R6303SB 

R6303SBE 

-'Sffl 

-Want to use RII 

s-FH$$ system 

• ^ 

S-FHSS 

R2006GS 

R2106GF 

R2008SB 

(Usable receivers) 

(The time ot Deremhi'r, ?{)'• '>) 

System Type 

• FASSTest 14CH -- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to 

IK channels (linear 12-t ON/OFF2) can be used. 

H FASSTest 12CH — FASSTc-sl system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12 

channels (liiiearlO+GN/OFF2) can be used.Telemetry Sensor cannot be used, but 

the response speed is a faster than that of the 14CH mode. 

• Artnlocj SIHVOS cnnmil be used Willi Hut R7008SI! in Ihi; TASSTesI 1VCH rnocia. 

B FASST MULTI 

IFASST7CH 

3 S-FHSS 

FASST-Mlll.TI system receiver mode. Up lo 14 channels (linear \7.-< CHi'Girf7} can 

be used. 

— FASST-7CH system receivei mode. Up to V channels can be used. 

-- S-Fl iS'j system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used. 
FUNCTION Channel ossignrrent of each function can be changed. 

When van select model and wing (swash) types, 

you will find lli.it the optimized combinations of 

servo output channels and functions have been 

already preset. If you would like, you can freely 

change combinations of servo output channels, 

functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and control (slicks, 

switches, and trim levers). 

'You can alio assign the same fiuuiiim u> multiple servo 

For FASST 7CH mode, you c 

channels. For S-FHSS mode, 

linear channels. 

only 7 linear 

3ii set only 8 

Channel Replacement 

When ihe channel is 

in, replaced channel u 

replaced in the Function 

ses the selling data (ATV, 

SUN-TRIM. RhVHRSli, F/S, and 1M-7S, etc.). 

Servo Output Channels 

For FASSTcst 14CH mode, you can set 12 linear 

channels and two digital channels. For FASSTcst 

12CH mode, you can set 10 linear channels and 

two digital channels. For FASST MULT mode, you 

can set 12 linear channels and two digital channels. 

Motor Function 

If you have either a Glider or Airplane Model 

Type selected, and clicose to activate the Moiur 

function, a reverse setting screen is displayed. 

•If Yt;s is sel.va-d, the o.Ujiut is vevo«c<i IfNO is selected, 

the output is iwxm.il. 

A Warning 

i Select (FUNCTION) in the Linkage menu a 

access the setup screen shown below by louch 

ihe RTN bul'on. 

0 As a safety precaution to prevent the motor 

from starting unexpectedly, please switch 

off the motor accordingly. We also suggest 

removing the propeller from the motor as an 

additional precaution. 

• Trim operation mode 

"COMB": Combination mode 

i r.nr< "SEPAR": Separate mode 

It sets up by T1-T4 SET o! I INKAGf. MENU. 

T1 SEPflR 

T3 SEPflR 

T2 SEPftR 

T4 SEPflR 

<Sensof TouchTM 

i ] tic uispuy screen is an example. The 

screen depends cm the mode! type.) 

Function change 

1. Move the cuisor to the function item of the 

channel you want to chonge and louch the 

RTN button. 

•The l-mctiwi selection street! is displayed. 

2. Move the cursor to the function name you 

wont to sel and louch the RTN button. 

3. Touch the RTN button io execute the 

change. (When you wanl io cancel tnis 

operation, touch the SI button.) 

•Multiple chained IM;I 6c ;,isig;ie<( Co o:ie fimclior,. 

Operation control change: 

1. Move the cursor lo the 'CTRL" item of the 

channel you want to chonge and touch the 

RTN button. 

HJSfl SELC 

02 SB SF RDT2 

J3SC SO LST3 

JA SD 8H RS T4 — 

2. Move the cursor fo She control ycu wont to 

change, and louch Ihe ?TN buDcn. 

Cuniber/Molor/Huttcrlly control setting (j»ll<li;r) 

9CA*8 LSH — 

106FLV J2Q — 

11 HOT SGG — 

12 BUM — — 

Camber, Motor or Butterfly control group/ 

single setting is peiformed at the function 

selup screen. 

"G': Group (oomtrion to all conditions) 

'S": Single |se: for each condition) 

Move the cursor to the "TRIM" item of the 

channel you wont fo chonge and touch the 

KTNbjtto/i. 

The following items 

setup screen: 

T be set at ine trin 

Touch Ihe RTN button to chonge the mode. 

(To terminate input and return to the original 

stole, touch the SI button.) 

[NORM]: Normal mode. Normal trim (parallel 

shift (rim) operation. 

[ATI): ATI operation mode. Maximum 

change near idle or low-stick position, 

normally used with throttle Irim. !f is also 

possible to reverse Ihe travel. 

•fNUR,MAf.]pUVI-RS!-;j selection is possible in "AT!." 

Throttle trim (helicopter only) 

•The throttle trim in conditions other than "Normal" 

condition c.m Iw inhibited. 

When other thon normal condition is 

selected, move the cursor to throttle him on 

(he function setup screen and touch the RTN 

button for I second. 

1 AIL Ji Tl Si 

)"X" is .ItspUed, Tl IK tr 

Trim rate setting 

Move the cursor to the [RATE] item 

touch Ihe RTN bullon lo switch io ihe • 

input mode. 

Set the trim rate by scrolling tne touch se 

Initial value: +30% 

Adjustment range : - 150-+150% 

(When die RTN button is touched tor one second. :li 

e.j 

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment a 

return lo Ihe cursor mode. 

Channel replacement 

Move the cursor io the Irim, lever, etc. you 

won! to se' and touch the RTN button. 

and 

:lcita 

Move the cursor to the channel # you want 

to replace ond louch Ihe RTN button to 

switch lo Ihe dota input mode. 

Select the destination channel ti by scrolling 

Ihe touch sensor. A confirmation message 

oppeors. Touch the RTN button to replace 

the channel. (To terminate input and return 

lo the original staie, touch the SI bullon.) 

frim mode selection 

Move the cursor lo the (MODE) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

Select Ihe trim mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. A confirmation message appears. 

SOB-TR/M Setting o' neulrol posilion o* each servo. 

The Sub-Trim function is used lo set the servo 

neutral position, and may he used lo make fine 

adjustments to the control surface after linkages 

and pushrods arc hooked up. When you begin io set 

up a model, be sure thai ihe digital trims are set to 

iheir center position. 

• Select [SUB-TRIM) 

Ihe setup scree 

RTN button. 

-i Ihe Linkoge menu one access 

shown below by touching fhe 

HOME/EXIT but! 

.-HIJrBfSHZI U? 

lfllL +0; sGERR +0 

Oi 'ii0 £ELE +8; 6RIL2 +0 

sTHR +0! 7VPP +0 

4RUD +0| SRUX5 +0 

<SensorTouch'M> 

jy sewn is MI i-A-imple. Tne 

pends tin the model type.) 

Sub-trim adjustment 

1. Move the cursor to the channel you want to 

adjust ond touch tne RTN button to switch to 

the dalo input mode. 

2. Adjust the rote by scrolling the louch sensor. 

Iniiial value: 0 

Adjustment rcnge: -2dO-+2dO (steps) 

{When the RTN Initl.iii is touched fur one second. sub-trim is 

•Ik-finc Pili-'rim adjustment, it is very in:porUnt to adjust the 

linkages .it Oie control surfecc so Otat you do no; >.w subirim, eicc/it for wry nmni'.<: adjustments. 

3. Touch the RTN bullon lo end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

4. Repeat this procedure for each channel. 

REVERSE Use lo reverse the throw d reclion. 

Servo Reverse changes the direction of an 

individual servo's response to a control input. 

l

;or CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the 

section <m Swasli AFR before reversing any servos. 

With CCPM helicopters, always complete your 

servo reversing prior lo any other programming. 

If you use pre-built Airplane/Sailplane functions 

that control multiple servos, it may be confusing 

to tell whether ihe servo needs to be reversed or a 

selling in the function needs to be reversed. See the 

instructions for each specialized function for further 

details. Always check servo direction prior to every 

flight as an additional precaution lo coniimi proper 

model memory, hook tips, and radio function. 

• Seleel [REVERSE] in the Linkage menu ond access 

the selup screen shown below by touching the 

RfN button. 

AMS=L 1/2 

iRIL NORM! sflIL2N0RM 

EELE NORM; 7UPP NORM 

3THR NORMi sflUX5 NORM 

4RUD NORMi sCHMBNORM 

BGERR NORM: I oflUX 1 NORM 

• (Tin- itUpl.y *KI 

Servo reversing procedure 

•Upon setup coinpleti 

). Move Ihe cursor lo Ihe channel you wont to 

reverse and touch the RTN button to switch 

fo fhe dofa input mode. 

2. Select fhe direction by scrolling the touch 

sensor. A confirmation message appears. 

(NORM): Normal 

[REVj: Reverse 

3.Touch the RTN bulton to change Ihe 

direction. |To terminate input and return to 

the original state, touch the S1 button.) 
It SAl'i Sets the- servos operating position when transmitter signals can no 

longer be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops. 

predefined control suddenly moves to a position 

you did not command, land nt once and check your 

leceivor batteiv. 

may be used 10 set up 

move to in the case of 

The Failsafe (unci: 

positions that the sen 

radio interference. 

You may set either of two positions for each 

channel: Hold, where the servo maintains its last 

commanded position, or Failsafe, where each 

servo moves to a predetermined position. You may 

choo.se either mode for each channel. (FASST 7CH 

mode: CII3 only) 

The T14S0 system also provides you with an 

advanced battery monitoring function that warns 

you when the receiver battery has only a little 

power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved 

to the defined failsafe position. (l-ASST 7CH 

mode: CHJ only) The battery failsafe may be 

released by operating a predefined control on the 

transmitter (default is throttle), do not continue 

to fly, land as soon as possible. Remember, if (he 

• Select [FAIL SAFE} in the Linkage menu and a 

the setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. 

fFfllL SRFEH 1/4 

F/S B . F/S ROS 

iRIL HOLD OFF 

2ELE HOLD OFF 

3THR HOLD OFF 

4RUD HOLD OFF 

2T battery. 

Defines servo position when signals are lost and 

when receiver battery voltage becomes low, 

A Warning 

O I'or safety, always set the fail safe functions. 

• Rfuura'^i lo sc: tiie ilmrtle cfusnii:: tail Sale Iiirciirui so thai 

('ushing of liic mocld a! f'.dl liiiui vvtic.i normal radio waves 

be received dtw so interference, eic., is wry da^erous. 

•Il'ihc bdiu-iy fnii safe is lese: l>y tlv lh<oi;!c .«:ek, il may 

lliiuHle ilwv aid (he model witj c.inl<.:n<e lo lly. !f>ott have 

a.i}• (Jcuhfs, inur.^lidtcly h:ul. 

iThc display screen is an example. "£Vie 

screen rlei-iends mi the model IJT'- } 

<SensorTouch,M> 

Fail safe sotting procedure 

1. Move the cursor to The "F/S" item ot the 

channel you wont to set and toucn me KIN 

button lo switch to the data input mode. 

2. Select the f7S mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. A confi'mation messcge eppears. 

•The. iy blin-;> 

3. Touch the RTN button. (Touch the SI button 

to stop setting.) 

•'ItUM 

4. Move the cursor lo the "POS" item. 

Hold the corresponding stick, knob, slider, 

etc. in the position you want the servo 

to move to when the fail sale function is 

activated and Touch tiie RTN button for one 

second. 

»tf you >'an'. U. icUwiiut channel lo Ac tiukl mode, move 

th« eutsor lo ihe i • S" item and touch the RTN button 

Ic npu: mode. Select die I'.'S nnute hy 

a: ..to by touching tJic RTN buito«!' 

Batlcrv (ail safe setting procedure 

Battery 'oil safe can be sef for each channel 

tjy me same memoa as fhe fail safe setting 

procedure. Selud ond set the ileni. 

[ONj: Battery foil sofe function ON 

(OFF): Battery tail safe function OFF 

Battery fail safe release switch .veiling 

This function temporarily reieoses the bottery 

foil sale function, so the fuselage con 

recover after the bottery foil sofe function 

was activated by a drop in the receivet 

battery voltage. This selling selects the switch 

which releases the battery fail safe function. 

1. Move fhe cursor to the (RELEASC S.F/S) item in 

the setup screen (tost page). 

2. Touch fhe R1N button. 

'Tiie switch selection scroti is c-itM. 

*1-0! a detailed <k-scriplk.il of •:io switch Action <,ud ONOt-T <U;ec:i<ni selling MCLHOD, IEE [Switch Sailing MOIIKHI) 

a; die back of litis manual. 

KM) POINT 

The Htul Point function adjusts the lell and right 

servo throws, generates differential throws, and 

will correct improper linkage settings. 

The travel rate can be varied from 0% to 140% 

in each direction on channels 1 to 12{FASSTesi 

12CH mode). Also, the limit point where servo 

throw slops may be varied from 0% to 155%, 

Sets the travel and t mil point of each servo. 

. Select [END POINT] in 

access the setup screen 

Ihe RTN button. 

Linkage menu and 

vn below by touch'ng 

kl«li>dilt!lil 1/3 

Ti'TMX ++0 o++ 

•r.g 1 ifllL 135 100 100 135 

Mor, i> 2 ELE 135 100 100 135 

3 THR 135 100 100 135 

4 RUD 135 100 100 135 

{llOVbl) 1 1 

Servo travel adjustment 

1. Move Ihe cursor to the travel icon of the 

channel you wont to adjust onfi touch the 

KIN button to switch to the daio input mode. 

2. Ajust Ihe rote by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: !00% 

Adjustment range: 0%~! 40% 

•When the RTN button is lotivhe.l for one second, ihe rale is 

reset lo llu- initial value. 

Touch the RTN button to enc' adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

3. Repeal this procedure for eoch rate. 

Limit point adjustment 

1. Move the cursor to Ihe limil point icon ol the 

chonnel you want to ocjust and touch the 

RTN button fo switch to the dota input mode. 

2. Ajusl the limil pain- by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initio! value: i 35% 

Adjusiment range: 0%~!55% 

•When llic RTN fa;ill0i! is Southed for one second, ihe iiir.il 

point ii reset so the initial value. 

Touch the RTN button io end adjustment ond 

return to the cursor mode. 

3. Repeat this procedure lor each limit point. 

St' lRV'O SPFf i> Sets the speed of each sen/o. 

The speed of the servo /ram 1CM to I2CH of 

operation can be set up. 

it can adjust lo 0-27. 

Speed becomes slow as a numerical value's 0 

increases i« (he state of the fastest of the scno. 

D!;t.AY (r.icxlel menu : only airpl.W 

Willi TttK 

• Select (StiSVO SPHEOj In Ihe trnkoge menu end 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

ihe; RTN button. „ 

1/2 

iRIL 0 eQEAR 0 

2ELE 0 sVPP 0 

sTHR 0 ?flUX5 0 

4RUD 0 sflUX4 0 

tvrjred] —' I ichor.r-i?li 

(7!ic Jisptay screen is aii example The 

screen (lep.-iuk on lt>e n;o«iel :y|>e.) 

<SensorTouch: 

Servo speed setting 

1. Touch tiie Speed button of the channel you 

wan! to set. 

2. Use the adjustment buttons to adjust the 

se.'vo speed. 

•Initial value: 0 

•Adjustmenl range: 0-27 jsiGps) 

* WiR-i the ItTN bulUm is louehed fur one second, llie rule is 

3. Repeal this procedure for each channel. 

82 

jimcvr 

Stops the engine safely and easily.(airpiane end helicopter only) 

ThroHle cut provides an e;jsy way to stop the *Siiaec< 

engine. Generally speaking, modelers will do so , ^ 

by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle. T,t 

The action is not functional at high throttle to eonditi< 

avoid accidental dead stick landings, 'fhe switch's 

location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults cmititwe i 

to NULL. "l! the com 

Individually adjust (he Throttle Cut activation ihe.swisi 

setting for each condition, (helicopter) 

• Select {THR CUTj in fhe linkage menu and access 

fhe setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. 

iille Cut o 

oule Cut I 

ThrmUe Cuv 

e condition is t lo an inhibited 

liiibited (IN111 die Tliroilie Cut is oil' if 

position 

Throttle c»l selling procedure 

1. Acfivafe fhe function: 

Move the cursor to the (ACT- item ond touch 

Ihe RTN button Ic switch lo the data input 

mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

'The display blinks. 

Touch the RTN button to activate fhe 

funclion end return lo ihe cursor mode. 

2. Switch selection: 

Move the cursor to -he jSWj item and access 

Ihe switch setup screen by touching the 

RTN button and selecl Ihe switch and ON 

drection. 

iiH-.i •e [SVM! 

Set-ini; Moltiod] nt the l> 

3. Throttle cut position setting: 

Move the cursor to the [POS] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. 

Adjust the servo operation position of throttle 

cut operation by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 17% 

Adjustment range: G%-50% 

•When die KIN b;i!!on is loucheif lor one second, tfx icrvu 

operation position is reset lo ihe initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

ond return to the cursor mode. 

•Willi llie selected cut switch ON .uut the ihwito stick at idle; 

adjust die i4W until tiie eii;;ine consislunlly tins off. 

liouewr. be sure ih.it tin- ihrollto linkage is not pulled loo 

» Individually adjust the Throltie Cut activation 

setting lor each condition, (helicopter) 

-• Throtfie 

cut status 

Designating a Throttle Cut setting position. 

(helicopter) 

•"THRO" velim;1. is common wilh .ill con.filiwi 

A Warning 

O N'onnal setting is sligluly above idle. 

I. To odd (lie Throrf/e Cui position, use the 

cursor to seteel Ihe THRO percentoge 

desired, then press and held the RTN button 

for one second. 

retFi . Throttle 

•—• Thro? tie 

slick position 
Df.:E DOWN Lowers Ihe eng'ne idling speed.(airplane only| SWASH RSN'G Limiis the swash plale travel to a fixed range. {He!.copter only) 

The Idle Down function lowers the engine (o 

its idle position. Like Throttle Cut, this is usually 

accomplished by flipping a switch w ith the throttle 

slick a! idle. I he action is not functional at high 

throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The 

switch's location and direction must be chosen, as 

ii defaults to NULL. 

• Select (IDLE DOWN] in the Linkoge menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN button. 

<SensorTouch' 

nt throttle position — 

Idle down setting procedure 

1. Activate fhe function: 

Move the cursor to the [AO] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch to Ihe dotes input 

mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling Ihe tench 

sensor. 

•The dismay blinks. 

Touch the RTN button to activate Ihe 

function and rekifn to Ihe cursor mode. 

2. Switch selection: 

Move the cursor to the (SWj Item and access 

the swtfch setup screen by touching Ifte RW 

button. Select the switch and ON direction. 

3. Offset rate setting: 

Move Ihe cursor to the (OFFSET) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch !o the data 

input mode. 

Adjust the servo offset rote at idle down 

operation by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment tenge: -WD%-~0%-+)00% 

"M.iximum offset annum! is lu-jr nuxim 

'Winn ihe k't N button is touched for i 

Touch Ihe RTN button lo end the adjustment 

and return to fhe cursor mode. 

This function limits ihe swash travel to a fixed 

range in order to prevent damaging the swash 

linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons 

and elevators. It is very useful in 3D aerobatics 

which use a large travel. 

• Select [SWASH RING] in the Linkage 

menu arid access the setup screen 

shown below by touching ihe RTN 

buffon. 

ACT ACT { \ 

RRTE 100 % 4" ) 

ELE +0X V _jV^ 

RIL +OX T 

• The operating range display area: — 

The vertical direction shows fhs 

elevator travel. Tne Horizontal 

d'rection shows the aileron travel. 

Swash ring setting procedure 

!. Activate the function: 

Wove Ihe cursor to She (ACT) item and touch 

Ihe frits' button TO switch fo the dofci input 

mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

"The display bfitiks. 

Touch -he RTN button to activate Ihe 

function and return to she cursor mode. 

2. Ro-e setting: 

Wove the cursor to the [RATE] item touch the 

RTN button to switch to the dala input mode. 

Set the rate by scrolling the touch sensor, 

iniliol vclue: 500%. 

Adjustment range: 50 to 200%. 

'When tin; RTN button is to.iched for one socuiid, the rale is 

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

» When the swash ring lunctian is activated, 

a circle is disptcyec in the operating 

range display areo and the rote input box 

is displayed. Stick operation is limited to 

the cieo oi this circle. 

<SensorToucti,H> 

84 -'-i 

SWASH Swash AFR and linkage cotrection function, (helicopter only, except 

swash type K-1) Miving rate setting procedure 

Neutral Point 

At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates from 

a perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage 

compensation t'unciiims in this menu may not 

compensate effectively. To correct this use the 

Neutral Point function. This will move the neutral 

point of the servos to the actual perpendicular 

position. However, dirs aJjcisfmerK changes only 

the axis point of the compensation functions in this 

menu, and does not affect the neutral position of 

other functions. 

Swash AFR 

Swash A1;R function reduces, increases, or 

reverses the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and 

collective pilch functions, by adjusting or reversing 

the motion of all servos involved in that function, 

only when using that function. 

Mixing Rate 

This mixing is used to compensate the swashplate as necessary during specific control inputs. 

The following compensation mixing is possible; 

PIT to AIL, PIT to ELK, AIL to PIT, ELK lo AIL, 

and ELE to PiT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swashpinle to for proper operation of each control using 

the corresponding compensation mixing. 

Linkage Compensation 

This compensation mixing is used lo correct the 

swash-plate for pitch control at low pitch and high 

pitch. 

Speed Compensation 

This function is used to cancel the reaction that 

is generated by the difference in the movements of 

each servo when the swash-plate moves. 

Subtrini 

Subtrim for aileron, elevator and pitch can be set 

during swash setting. 

Pitch adjustment function 

High, neutral and low pitch fixed outputs can be 

used while adjusting the pitch. 

» Select (SWASH) in the Linkoge menu ond access 

the setup screen shown below by touching the 

-SPEHII 1/6 

NEUTRRL RFR 

o- lul POS 50 y. AIL +50 x 

ELE 

PIT 

+50 y, 

+50 x 

<SensorTouch1' 

Neutral point setting procedure 

The neutral point becomes the correction 

standard point. 

!. Neutral point setting 

Wove the cursor to the (POS) item and hold 

the pitch operation so ihot ihe servo horn is 

o! o rjghl ongle lo Ihe linkoge rod end Touch 

'he RTN button for one second. This value 

indicates the servo's neutral position. 

After reading the neutral point, use the 

other correction functions to moke further 

adjustments. 

Swash Ai-K setting procedure 

i tie swash AfK tunciion makes adjustments so 

thai the servos travel the specified amount by [AIL], 

[ELE], and (PIT) operation. 

1. Wove the cursor to the (unction you wont to 

adjust arid touch the RTN button to switch to 

the dato input mode. 

2. Adjust the AFR rale by scrolling the touch 

Initial value: +50% 

Adjustment range: -100%-+100% 

"When the RTN button is toadied foro:;e second. die AFK 

rato is reset lo t'ue initial value. 

Touch the RIM button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

The HR3 swash-plate type will be used as an 

example to describe mixing rate setting. The mixing 

used in other swash modes may be different, 

however, the setting procedure is the same. 

-•ELE 100* 106k 

•Adjust wiling t 

lettylh ol'thtf tinkle r»d so that the swash plate is horiAim.il 

at this position. 

•The snb-irir>; function can be used to make suuli 

'Adjusl so Dial :lie pitch curve is .1 straight iiite awl Ihe 

(iciicopter achieves ii:,ixim:un pitch. 

t-t-.- AtTiV buffon i« MVTFDI lo the C1J:J iitpul mode. Touch 

the RTN button to end adjustment ;mcl return to the cursor 

I. Adjusting fhe oile'on opero'-ion (AIL io PiT] 

Adjusl Ihe AIL to PIT rate so there is no binding 

in the elevator or pitch movement when the 

aileron stick is moved to the left ond right. 

•The let! and right sides can be adjusted uidividjdtly 

2. Adjusting the elevator operation [ELE to Allj/ 

[ELE io PIT] 

Adjust Ihe ELE fo All and ELE to PIT rates so 

there is no binding in the aileron or pitch 

movement when the elevator stick is moved 

up and down, 

'The -.ip and du*vn sides «n be iiitjtis'.ed indi\ idiistty. 

3. Adjusting the pilch operolion (PIT lo AIL)(P!T 

to ELE] 

Adjust the PI: to All ond PI! to ElE rates so 

that the swash plate moves to the level/ 

horizontal position when Ihe throttle stick was 

moved lo maximum low and full high, 

'Adjust l>y trolling the touch soit*>i. 

•The slow and liifj.li sides can be adjusted individually. 

Linkage compensation setting procedure 

v/ith the aileron at co/feefive pitch coft-rai fur (tut- pilch sail 

hig.it pitch. 

to the data input mode. Touch the RT.V tiullon to end 

adjustment and return to the cursor ti-otle 

1. Compensoting aileron input (AIL) 

Set the throttle to the lowest position. Move 

Ihe aileron stick to Ihe left and right and 

adjust Ihe aileron compensation amount 

so that interference in the elevator or pitch 

direction is minimal. 

•Tli to! individually, 

•it' he eoir.pcnsation anwunl 

u, villi the direction JDIK.j 

2. Cc , „ . JUt JEI.E] 

Adjust the elevator compensation amount 

so that the aileron or pitch direction 

interference when Ihe elevalor slick was 

moved up and down is minimal. 

3. Repeot steps 1 and 2 obove, perform aileron 

ond elevotor compensation similarly at full 

throttle. 

Speed compensation setting procedure 

1. Move the cursor lo Ihe "SPEED' item and 

touch Ihe RTN button lo switch to the dato 

input mode. 

2. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point 

position. Quickly move the elevator stick and 

adjust Ihe speed compensation amount 

(SPEED) for minimum interference in the pitch 

direction. 

•Adjust by scrolling Ihe touch sensor 

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and 

return to Ihe cursor mode. 
Suhtrim selling procedure 

Subirim can be 

sluing screen. 

set on the last page of the swash 

IttVlNG 10 

i/4 SKT. Digilal Irirn sellings 

This function adjusts the digital Irim's step 

.mmutrf and open-Kiwi mode (TI 

When the flight conditions are set, (lie trim 

operation can be coupled with the conditions when 

combination mode is selected. 

The T14SG unit ol'trim is displayed on the home 

Only the trim displayed on the home screen can 

be moved to (lie cento pavilion wiihoui changing 

the actual trim's memory position. 

Pitch adjustment procedure 

The pitch adjustment function can he used on the 

last page of the swash selling screen. 

l.Call the last page of the swash setting 

screen. 

Z.VVhen the cursor is moved to a pilch 

adjustment button arid the RTN button is 

touched, the corresponding pilch is oulpul. 

' in the pilch adjustment mink- an * is displayed a', the UTl 

siik of ihe current u.itput selling button. 

•If lite cursor !S moved m .mother biiUon and the 11TN initio!', 

HEUTftAL 

LOW 

KW1H0 1 

•6 (EUTRfiL 

•e LOW 

tWVIHQ 1 

•-unction detoils ore as follows: 

ft'jMor. function 

High H:qh pHch fixed ouloui mode 

Neuirol Newlral pitch ti>:!?rf cuip'jl mode 

low Low niton fixed oulpul mode 

Moving Cyclic Ditch cnjiput mode 

Soiling range: s to 100 

"When tiic set value is U;^c. mot 

"WHO DS 

» Select [T1 -T< SET.) in the Linkage menu and access 

the setup screen shown below by touching "he 

RTN button. . 

• Trim operation mode 

"COMB.": Combination mode 

"SEPAR": Separate mode 

STEP MODE'*' UNIT 

Tl 4 SEPAR — 

T2 4 SEPAR T1-T4 

T3 4 SEPAR MEMORV 

T4 4 SEPAR INH 

iSensorTovch1" 

Control step amount setting 

1. Move the cursor to the [STEP] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch io the data input 

mode. 

2. Set the control step amount by scrolling the 

toucn sensor. 

Initial value: A 

Adjustment range: 0-200 

•When itic RTN butioti is wilted for one seanui. tlie control 

value i 

!() the lllilijl Sallh". 

3. touch the R1N button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

Separate/combination mudc selection (Heli and 

Glider only) 

!. Move the cursor to the [MODE) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

Select the mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. A confirmation message appears. 

»TIK- di>?t;iy blinks. 

(COMB.}: Combination mode. The trim's dola 

is reflected in all flight conditions. 

[SEPAR]: Separate mode. Trim adjustments 

are made individually for each flight 

condition. 

3. Touch 1he RTN button. (To terminate the 'nput 

and return to the original state, touch the SI 

button.) 

Display unit selection 

1.Move tne cursor lo the (UNI 1 ] ilem end 

touch the RTN bulton to switch lo the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor, A confirmation messoge appears, 

•ThedispUy blinks. 

A slep number is displayed on the norne 

scieen. There is no unit display. 

(%]:is displayed as c unil. 

3. "ouch Ihe RTN bulton. (To lenninole Ihe input 

and return to the original stale, touch the SI 

button.) 

Trim Memory Operation procedure 

t. Move Ihe cu'sor to the (11-14 MEMORY} item 

ond touch the RTN bullon to switch to the 

data input mode. 

2. Select Ihe ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. A confirmation message appears. 

(INHJ: Inhibited "Thedisplay blinks. 

(ACT}: Activated 

3. Touch the RTN bulton. (To terminate Ihe input 

and return to the originol slate, touch Ihe St 

button.) 

4. At the home screen, move Ihe cursor to Ihe 

trim you wonl to chonge and touch the RTN 

for one second. Ihe trim display is moved lo 

Ihe center povtion. 

*\Vh«n -.lie function is inhibited, (lie trim position returns to 

WARNING v Baltery alarm voltage set Warning normal reset 

The T14SG includes an audible alarm that 

sounds when the transmitter's battery voltage drops 

below a pre-detemiined setting; adjustable for cell 

Ivpes and voltages. 

Mixing warning at power ON can he reset to 

OFF. 

Warning display: 

Airplane: Throttle cut/ldfe down/Throfffe 

position/Snop-roll/Motor posifion/Airbroke/ 

Motor 

Helicopter: Condiiion/Tlnollle cut/Throllle 

position/throlUe Hold 

Glider: Condition/Motor positicn/lrim-mix/Motcr 

» Select (WARNING) in the Linkage menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN butlon. 

1/2 

ON/OFF Vibes 

ihe 

LOW BRTTERV 5. 6V OFF 

jtion THR CUT ON OFF 

IDLE DOWN ON OFF 

THR POS. ON OFF 

• Push SI button to advance lo next page. 

iwsismiBi 2/2 

ON/OFF Vibes 

SNAP ROLL ON OFF 

MOTOR POS ON OFF 

RIRBRRKE ON OFF 

MOTOR ON OFF 

Displaying dola ir 

choice of data from the 

TELEMETRY 

This screen displays y 

receiver. 

Also warnings can be activated regarding 

other data from your aircraft. For example, if ihe 

receiver voltage drops, the user can be warned by 

an alami (and vibration)-

• (TELEMETRY] con be celled if the KOME/EXirfoufion 

is pushed from a home scteen. 

• Select [TELEMETRY] in Ihe Linkage menu and 

access Ihe setup screen shewn below by touching 

Ihe RTN button. 

•II i-iuiiKil bo used in l-'ASST rmxle ami S-I1ISS i^r» 

•Only receiver vcllat'1 EXT volume cu.i f: 

JvVSSTv-s!l2(:jl»w<Ji:. 

'Tin: I'ASSTestMCU mode c.oi use all die lclcrr.c-:ry' 

• Receiver -> Transmitter. The 

reception strength is shown. 

3TELEMETRV 1 ¥ 1/3 

Rx-BATT. iTEMP. 

0.0V 

RECEIVER SBS-CiT 

EXT-VOLT 2 RPM 

0.0V 0rpri 

RECEIVER , •=!BS-0iRM/O 

• Push SI bul?on t> ivance to nexl poae. 

•TELEMETRV 1 T 2/3 

3 ALTITUDE 8 DISTANCE 

SBS-01R SBS-01G 

3 VflRIO 8 SPEED 

SBS-OIR SBS-01G 

<SensorTouchTW> 

Accessing and Activating the Linv Battery 

Alarm 

t.The Low Bottery (LOW BATTERY) alarm 

voffoge is accessed through the lUSG's 

System Menu. Within the System Menu, use 

the SensorTouchTM to highlight the SOUND 

option and then press the Return (RTN) 

button to confirm Ihe selection. 

2. Use the SensorTouch to scroll to the Low 

SaMe/y (LOW BATTERY) alarm, ond then press 

Ihe Return (RTN- butlon to access Ihe vollcge 

settings. Using the SensorTouch. adjust the 

voltage as desired and/or determined by 

the transmitter bottery pack befng utilized. 

The voltage oplions range from S.OV to 6.0V. 

Suggested voltage sellings are as follows: 

•5-Ct-ll NiCtl or NiMH: 5.6V 

•2-Ccll lil-'e: 6.0V 

'Abiiul low b.iltery voltage, all the models included in one 

'Mdsniiiter are chaiiye-d 1:1 common. It cannol set. to different 

Warning normally resetting method 

1. Move Ihe cursor to the item you want to 

reset lo OFF ond touch the RTN button to 

switch to the data input mode. 

?. Select Ihe OFf- mode by scrolling the touch 

•Titodisplay blinks. 

3. Touch the RTN bulton. (To terminate the input 

and return fo the original state, touch the Si 

button.) 

How to see telemetry date 

I. Telemetry screen con be called if Ihe HOME/ 

EXIT button is pushed from the home scre&n. 

Or select [TELEMETRY] in the l.inkcge menu 

and access the setup screen by touching 

the RTN button. 

I. li each item is chosen and the RTN bulton is 

pushed, an alarm setup can be performed 

with the minimum/maximum after a 

transmitter is turned on. 

•Uctciver \ul!.tj>! can i>c checked itismedt.itely. An optiumit 

you would like lo sec oilier infonv.atiiin. 

•No sjieci.il scntp is necessary if each sensor displayed 

is left as in the default setup. Separate sensor ID 

is also unnecessary. However, if two or more of 

one kind of sensor is used, setup is required in the 

"SENSOR" menu. 

A Warning 

Q Do nol v 

flight. 

atch the transmitter screen during 
ITCLKVirHtV ; H.1-BA1 T, Displaying daia from Ihe battery voltage 

In this screen, the batteiy voltage of n receiver i 

displayed. 

If it becomes higher or lower than the setting ai 

alarm and/or vibraiion will alerl you. 

•It cannot ho used hi UASST :v.,vlcS-H1SS iiwdc. 

*(> 111v receiver voltage ;nnt L-'XT vcili.'tgi.' ,-UII bo us 

i-ASS'iVsEl2C:H mode. 

*Tiw rASSTcslMCIl mode use "It O.o letenietiy lx.:>c 

• Select (Rx-BAVT.) in the TELEMETRY screen and 

access the setup screen shown oelow by touching 

Ihe 3TN button. ' 

• The max.mum and 

powering ON ore shown. 

• Receiver baiter/ voltage 

/ 

< MIN/MRX > / |3.0V 

0.0V 0.0V 

f^RLERT INH 

^THRESHOLD 4.0V 

w i tes 0FF~-

snsorTooch 

> (The "down'' arrow will 

indicate thol an alarm will 

sound when the voltage 

drops to below the setting. 

Alert set 

1. Move Iho cursor to the {ALERT (INH) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the- ACT mode by screwing the touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input 

ond return to :he original state, touch the Si 

button.) 

4. Move the cursor to the [THRESHOLD [4.0V] 

item ond touch the RTN button to switch to 

the da'o input mode. 

5. Ajust the m:e by scrolir.c) the touch sensor. 

Initio! volue: 4.0V 

Adjustment range: O.OV-8.4V 

•When the IITN hu'losi U lumheit for one secmd, the rale is 

6. Touch the R1N button. (To terrrinote the input 

ond icturn to the original stale. touch the SI 

button.) 

"Vibes" type 

I' ;he following types are selected, *i 

v.:".'ite dijr:r:c; the waii'nn.r 

TYPfl ggjj 

TYPE 2 j 

TYPES jjggjj 

TYPE, j@j 

iCI FMFTRY' £"" KT-YOI T Displaying dototrorn Ihe EXT batiery vollcge port 

"C.A-RVIN- ?00 of iviu.si be instated in ?h<-

The l-XT-VQLT screen will display the data ibraiion if 

from the EXT-baiiery output from the R700KSB 

receiver. Jn order to use Ibis function, ii is necassnty 

to connect Hxternal voltage connector of the 

R7008SB receiver to a CA-RV1N-700 (HJTM5551) 

or SBS-01V to the battery you desire to measure 

(he voltage of. 

You will be alerted by an alarm 

the voltage set by you is exceeded. 

*/( c.xiraif IK in MS.ST (.'>«/,• ati<! S -VIISS it: 

J>ie maximum end the minimum wbe 

Select (fcxl-VOU) In the TELEMETRY screen ond poweiing ON ore shewn. 

' • • • • • • EXT battery voltage ri shown below by louch'ng 

HOME/EXIT but 

/ • 

< MIN/MRX > S 

OMn6 0.0V 0.0V 

ttor. is 

f 4-flLERT INH 

•^-THRESHOLD 4.0V 

w i bes OFF—-

i (The oncw will indicate that 

on alarm will sound when 

the voltage drops to below 

the setting. 

Alert set 

1. Move Ihe cursor to Ihe IALF.RI (INH] Hem ond 

touch the RTN button to switch to the dato 

inDUt mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch Ihe RTN button, ("o >e/minale the input 

ond return to the original stole, touch the SI 

button.| 

4. Move the cursor to the {THRESHOLD [4.0V) 

item ond touch the RTN button to switch to 

the dato input mode. 

5. Ajusi the tate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Iniliol volue: 4.0V 

Adjustment range: C.OV-iQC.OV 

•When the RTN buy.o:i is touched lor one second, the rate is 

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input 

ond return to the orkjriol state, touch the SI 

button.) 

"Vibes" type 

If (be fo'tevMnq types s'e sekc.'ic, t; 

vihra'e (I'jtinC) the warning 

TYPC 1 

TYPE 2 

TYPE 3 

TYPE A ia 

EtE>fETilY : TOII-

'A tsinp 

TEMP. is a screen which displays/sets up 

(he temperature information from an optional 

temperature sensor. 

"I he temperature of the model (engine, motor, 

baucry etc.) which is Hying can be displayed. 

If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an 

alarm atui'or vibraiion will alert you. 

• Select [TEMP.} iri the TELEMETRY screen ond access 

ihe setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. ' 

Displaying dato from the temperature 

s'shirt? must be Installed in the ;<'•<'< 

•It caiin.it be usixt in FASST nwle .md S-1HSS ivodc 

•Only recover vollaj'.e ami F.XT vukaye t.i:i bo used ii 

i-"ASSTcsl|2CJl mode. 

•The ! ASS'J'cstl-ICII IIUHIK C.UI use all die u.-lcniuiiy fv 

» The maximum and ihe m!> 

powering ON are shown. 

< MIN/MflX ">. 

•t-RLERT INH 

•t-THRESHOLD +100° C 

tribes OFF 

,s the SI button too n to tr.< 

INH 

^THRESHOLD +0° C 

Wibes OFF 

Alert set: Hot warning 

1.Move the cursor to the 1 ALERT item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch fhe RTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return to the original state, touch the SI 

button.} 

4. Move Ihe cuisor to the TTHRESHOLD [+I03'€ ] 

item and touch the RTN butlon to switch lo 

Ihe data input mode. 

5. Ajust !h& rote by scroli'ng Ihe touch sensor. 

IniMai value: •' 100'C 

Adjustment range: t 'C -20G C 

{[THRESHOLD > (THRESHOLD) 

rose I to liie iuiiul vdluc. 

6. Touch ihe RTN bultof.. (To terminate Ihe inpul 

arid return to the original slate, touch the SI 

bulton.) 

Alert set: [..ow-tcmpcratnre warning 

1. 2/2 page is accessed by pushing SI. Move 

the cusor to the (ALER1 item and touch the 

RTN button to switch to the data input mode. 

2. Select Ihe ACT mode by scrolling tine touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN button. ITo terminate the input 

and relurn lo the original stale, -ouch the SI 

button.) 

4. Move the cursor to the [THRESHOLD |+0 'C | 

item ond touch the RTN button lo switch lo 

the data input mode. 

6. Ajust the rate by scrolling the 'ouch sensor. 

Iniliol volue: • 0"C 

Adjustment range: 0 C -I99 C 

([THRESHOLD > (THRESHOLD! 

•Whi-ii ihe RTN bunoti is uiuched Tor one setond, llie u'.e is 

rose! ui ;tie iuilial v.itne. 

6. Touch the RTN bulton. (To terminate the input 

and return to the original stale, touch the SI 

butlon.) 

24 ' 1 i„UuR<- %h-> 

RP.V1 is a screen which displays / sets up the 

RPM information from an optional RPM sensor. 

The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.) 

which is flying c.m be shown. 

If il becomes higher or lower than the setting an 

alarm and/or vibraiion will alert you. 

« Select [RPM) in the TELEMETRY screen 

and access the setup screen shown 

beiow by touching Ihe RTN button. 

Displaying data from Ihe RPM 

''U, Svrinor mu',1 he in ihe 

It c.'innnt IK uwl in FASST nuxlc ami S-IUSS n-cxie. 

Only rcccivor rolUi.e ami t-XT volume c.m ho used in 

ASS'kMnt'H motlc. 

The KASSTi')lt4rit mode c.m use .ill ihe lelemelry t'uu.Hu.:.? 

• The maximum and the minimum v 

powering ON ore sho^/n. 

' . RPM 

\ 1/2.. 

<MRX> ^0rpn 

0rpn 

, -t-RLERT INH 

^THRESHOLD 2? 000rpn 

•tvibes OFF-^. 

w/ 

2/2 

+RLERT 

^THRESHOLD 

^^ibes 

MAGNETIC 

INH 

OFF 

GEAR 

l\c-y 

of your 

usirifj is 

0rpn 

1.00 

. In "OPIICAi', the number 

blades of the propter (i 

o r) your -r-odet is entered 

Alert set: Over rotations Alert set : Under rotations 

1. Move the cursor to the [ALERT item and 

touch the RTN button lo switch lo the data 

ir-out mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sernor. 

3. Touch the RTN butlon. |!o terminate the inpul 

and return to ihe original stale, touch- the SI 

button.) " 

4. Move the cursor to the 'THRESHOLD 

[2000rpm)ilem and touch the RTN button to 

switch lo the dota input mode. 

5. Ajust Ihe rate by scrolling the touch sensor, 

initial value: 20C0rpm 

Adjustment range: lfpr>i~l50.0C0rpm 

([THRESHOLD > [THRESHOLD) 

*\V!»m die irTN buUo:, h for one winnl. &.c r.v.e is 

6. Touch Ihe RTN bulton. (To teiminate the input 

and return to the orig'nai state, touch the SI 

button.) 

I.Scroll to the second page by pushing SI. 

Move the cursor to the (ALERT item and 

touch Ihe RTN button to switch to the dcila 

inpui mode. 

2. Select the AC: mode by scrolling ihe touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN butlon, (To terminate the inpul 

on.d return to tne original stole, touch the S! 

button,) 

4. Move the cursor to fhe [THRESHOLD [GrprnJ 

item and (ouch the RTN bulton lo switch lo 

the dota input mode. 

5. Ajusi the rate by scrolling ihe touch sensor, 

Initial volue: Orpm 

Adjustment ronoe: Orprn- j 49.9V9rpm 

([THRESHOLD > [THRESHOLD) 

•Wiuvi '.he KTN ixjiuui is mijeh.'il Jt>r one secoml, tlic ivih- ri 

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return to the original state, touch the SI 

button.) 
"I El JvVIKTi ; ALTITIW. Deploying do'ci trorn (he ollilude 

:<nsor or Gi'S .senior must be in^ikui is 

ALTITUDE is a screen which displays / sets up ihe 

altitude intoini.itiou from an opiional aitiuide sensor or 

GTS sensor. The altitude of'tliu model which is ilyum can 

be known. If it becomes higher (low) than preset aliunde, 

you can IK.- lold by alarm. To show warning by vibration 

can also be chosen. Data when a power supply is hinted 

on shall he 0 in, and ii displays the altitude which 

dunged lioni thcie. l.'ven if Die altitude of an airfield is 

high. that shnll he 0 tn and the altitude difference from an 

. Select (ALTITUDE) in tlte TELEMETRY screen ond access I 

setup screen shown below by tovchng the RIN build 

airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates the altitude 

from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure will 

get lower as you go up in altitude, usinj! this the sensor 

will estimate the altitude. I'tca-.e understand chat an exact 

advanced display cannot he perfotmcd if atmospheric 

pressure changes in « weather situation -

•it camict bo used m JASST ami -S-MISS mode 

•Onlv receiver volume and l-XT voltage can be used >11 

l'ASSTesilJCH mode. 

'Tne l-ASSTtfst KCII mode c«nt tts-eaH tac tefemetrv timeriotw. 

The maximum nnd the minimum when 

powering ON ore shown. 

' AhikK'e 

JL3- <SensorTouch",,> 

indicate', Ihe alo'rn vMi 

sound when the altitude 

reoohos cjbove your sel 

vcluo. 

/I 

» [ Art downward arrow 

indicoles the alarm 

will sound when Ihe 

altitude reach 

below youi set valu 

< MIN/MRX 

•tfiLERT INH 

•^THRESHOLD +200 M 

•t-vibes OFF 

Prt!5s rh. 

1SHHHIH" 2 2 

+RLERT 

^THRESHOLD 

+Y i bes 

INH 

OFF 

-50 n 

REFERENCE SET 

SilII®#-

First, the set of a eft i-it. 

1.The model ond he 

alliiude sensor wa on. 

2. Move the cursor to ine [SEil o

T RErERENCE" 

ilem ond touch the RTN button to switch to 

trie dcita input mode. 

3. Touch the RTN button. (Io teftrvnute the input and 

return to the orioinol state, touch the SI button.) 

HI llic same aiiliclii You should p:<.soi More a iligin 

Alert sel : High side 

1.Move the cursor to ths- JALffRJ item and 

touch the RTN button to switch lo the dalo 

input mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return to the original state, touch the SI 

button.) 

4. Move tne cursor to the .'THRESHOLD f+200rn) 

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the dota input mode. 

5. Ajust the rote by scrolling the 'ouch sensoi. 

Initial value: +2C0m 

Adjustment range: -499m-+5.Q00m 

({THRESHOLD > [THRESHOLD! 

6. Touch tne RTN button. (To terminate the input 

ona teiurn to rne onginol sta^e. touch the SI 

button.} 

Alcrl set: Low side 

1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1. Move 

the cursor to the I ALERT item and touch the 

RTN butlon lo sv/itch to the data input mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

3. Touch the RTN button. (Jo terminate the input 

and return to the original stale, touch Ihe Si 

bulton.) 

<1. Move the cursor to the [THRESHOLD [-50m] 

item and touch ihe RTN button to switch to 

the ciota input mode. 

5. Ajust Ihe rate by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: -50m 

Adjustment tange: -50Cm~+4,999m 

([THRESHOLD > [THRESHOLD) 

"Whoa -he RTN bulton is touched for one- second, the rate is 

6. Touch Die RTN butlon. (To le'minote the input and 

return to the aig'nal sta'e, touch the S1 button.) 

96 "•*« s;f T h 

TICIXMia'RY : VARK.) 

'Ait sensot 

VARIO is ;i screen which displays / .sets up ihe 

variometer information from an optional altitude 

sensor or GPS sensor. 

The variometer of the model which is flying can 

be known. 

if it becomes higher or lower (han the selling an 

aiann and'or vibration will alcrl you. 

To ensure thai the pilot is aware as to the model's 

Displaying dalo from the variometer 

GI GPS ievxjr must be malted in ihe s-icraft, 

status, the T14SG incorporates a diflereni melody 

for ascent nnj descent. Additionally, depending 

upon the rate of climb or descenl. the tones vaiy (o 

indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or 

descending at a rapid ntfe. 

•It cannot be used in KASS'J modeami S-HISS mode. 

-Onlv receiver \ol!.ij;e ami liXT votive can Iw used in 

lv\SSTcs!)2Cll mode. 

•The IASSTesil'IC'ti mode car. use nil ihetelean-try functions. 

« The; moxirnum cincf the mirimum when 

povewcj ON oi<i showr. 

» J An dov^r-wcrd 

iruJicotes Iho atorm will 

sovna v/>\en the alh-une 

reaches below your set 

Alert sel: Rise side- Alert sel: Dive side 

1.Move ?fie cursor to fhe fALERT item arid 

touch the RTN button lo switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling fhe touch 

3. Touch the RTN button. (To temVnote the input 

ond return to the original state, touch the SI 

butlon.) 

4. Move the cursor to the [THRESHOLD [+0m/s] 

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the dola input mode. 

5. Ajust the rate byscrolfny the touch sensor. 

Initial value: +Cm/s 

Adjustment range: -49m/s-+S0m/s 

({THRESHOLD > JTHRESHOLO) 

•When ihe RTN huiton is touches! for one second, !t.e r.ue is 

reiel lo the initial v.tbio. 

6. Touch the RTN button. {To terminate Ihe input 

and return to the original state, touch the SI 

button.) 

1. Scroll to the second page by pushing SI. 

Move tile cursor to the [ALERT item and 

touch the RTN button to switch lo the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN button, (To trsnminole the input 

and return io Ihe original state, touch the Si 

butlon.) 

4. Move the cursor lo the [THRESHOLD [+Cm/s] 

item and louch the RTN bulton io switch to 

the dalo input mode. 

5. Ajust the rate by scrolling ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: +0m/s 

Adjustment ranee: -50m/s~+49m 

({THRESHOLD > ^THRESHOLD} 

"Wiien ihe RTN biition is icmehed for one second, the r.ile is 

reiel to lik- inilul value. 

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input ond 

return to "he ongnol stale, touch the SI button.| 

TKI.E.VICTKY ; BATI EftV 

In ihis screen, the baiiery voliage is displayed. 

In order to use ihis fiiiiciion. it is necessary to 

connecl External voltage connector of R7008SB <•> 

SBS-OIVo Haiteiy 

SBS-OIV measures iwo baiteries. The drive 

biUieiy connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P 

lines is displayed here. 

• Select [BATTERY] in the- TELEMETRY screen and 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN button. ^ 

Displaying data from the baitety voltage 

•

VS8S-0W must be implied iii fiivjaircrsd 

•It cannot be used in FASST moJe and S-I HSS mode. 

•Only reccix er volUii'.e and 1

:

.XT voli^e c.m be used ia 

l ASSTesllM.ll mode. 

•The FASSTesiKCH mode can use rdi (he telemein' tii'iclmn,. 

» Ttie moximum ond the 

powering ON are shown. 

» [The arrow v,-ill indicaie thot 

an alarm will sound when 

Ihe voltage drops lo below 

the selling. 

Alert set 

1. Move Ihe cursor io tlte [ALERT |INH) ilem and 

touch ttie RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select Ihs ACT mode by saoiling Ihe touch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return to the original state, louch the SI 

bulton.) 

4. Move the cursor to Ihe JTHRESHOLD [4.0V] 

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the data input niode. 

5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor, 

Initial value: 4.0V 

Adjustment range: O.CV~8.*V 

e RTN haiton is touciicd for one second, die rate is 

"Vibes" type 

if the fcllow^g types selected, the tiansr 

mEi ga 

TOE 2 > 

1YPE3 |0||-V • 

TYPE4 Iffooja K ^ * 

:t to die iii.il v. 

6. Touch the RTN button. (To laminate the input 

and return to the original state, touch the Si 

button.; 

TELfc'.MK'I'HY : DISTANCE 

Distance is a screen thai displays and sets the 

altitude data from tin SBS-01G (GPS Sensor) sold 

separately. The disiance to ihe airborne aircraft 

can be read by ihe transmitter. When ihe aircraft 

flics outside (inside) the set disiance the operator is 

alerted bv nn alarm and vibration. 

Displaying data from the distance 

"A GPS s-ii'-sor installed in the ;:irc!<:ft. 

II tw used in f'ASST mode and S-l l 1SS iiksIc. 

eccivcr voltage and Ii'XT voltage can be us> 

•The PASSTesil'tCil 

• Select (DISTANCE) in tho TEi.f. 

the setup screen shown be 

bution 

is the lecsiivioy o::cuic;cy tiom c> GPS 

oterltita. Plnosf! v/oil unlit it becomes 3 

iisploys. and push [HRFFRENCt] 

v by touch^io the 

G iii 1/3 

< MAX > 

t-ALERT INH 

^THRESHOLD 1 ? 000 

tvi bes OFF 

he icirrow shows 

3enfi11:1ecJ v/tien 

he distance drops 

selow the scst volue. 

iilttttSM* G ill 2/3 

,*RLERT ACT 

^-THRESHOLD 0 r-i 

+VibeS OFF / 

REFERENCE SET / 

pCfjt 

i cio:m setting rongc 

tm ~ 5.000m 

'ITHRESHOLD > ;TI IRESHOLD) 

Vibes" type 

.toncci nlorm set-mg rc.r.qp Om • 

[THRESHOLD > iTHKSSHOLD] 

First, the sel of a reference is re(|iiired. 

1.The model ond transmitter to which the GPS 

sensor wos connected ere turned on. 

2. II waits until Ihe GPS receiving accuracy 

displayed on o screen becomes three. 

3. M.ove the cursor to Ihe (SET) of "REFERENCE" 

item and touch the RTN button to switch 'o 

the daio input mode. 

4. Touch ihe RTN button. |To terminate the input and 

re'um to the original state, touch Ihe S1 bui ton.) 

Alcrl setting when aircraft goes too fur 

1.Move the cursor to the {ALERT item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the iouch 

sensor. 

3. Touch Ihe RTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return to Ihe orig'nol s

(ote. touch the SI 

bu?fon.| 

4. Move the cursor to the [THRESHOLD ! 1,000m] 

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the data input mode. 

5. Ajust the rate by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

•When the RTN button is touched for one second, die rate i> 

re-el to tire iiiiliai vjlvu. 

6. Touch the RTN button. {fo terminate ihe input 

and return to the original state, touch the $t 

button.) 
Alert selling when Hie aircraft approaches 

t.Access the second ocge by pushing SI. 

Move the cursor tc the JALERT item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the AC1 mode <:>/ scrolling the touch 

3. Touch :he RTN button. (To terminate ihe input 

and return to the oiiqinal state, touch the SI 

button.; " 

4. Move the cursor to 'he tTHRCSHOLD |0m)ilorn 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data input mode. 

5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

* When the RTN liui-on is touched (Vir one lecinici, ihe ia:c is 

6. Touch the R'lN bullon. (To terminate the input 

and retu.'n to the original state, touch the SI 

butlon.lSlant and surface distance 

• Select (DISTANCE) in the TELEMETRY screen by touching 

Ihe RTN bullon, And SI button is touched twice. 

• Altitude calculated os 

e; I he' siraigh I line 

distance (slant)" or surface 

distance on o mop can 

also be selected 

(3/3) 

Surface 

Altitude 

Two displays methods, straight line distance and 

surface distance, can be selected as shown above. 

1. Select page 3 by touching the SI buMcn twice 

from the "DISTANCE" screen. 

2. Select <SLANT> <SURfACE> next to "MODE", 

scroll to -he desired method and touch Ihe 

RTN button. 

TEl.EMKTRV ; SPEED 

The speed screen displays <md sets tin- speed dala 

from an SBS-01G (GPS sensor) sold separately. 

The speed of the aircraft during flight can be 

displayed. 

Alter Hight, the maximum speed during flight 

can lie viewed. Because litis speed is based on 

position data from it GPS satelliie, the ground speed 

Displaying dale (com 'he speed 

• A GP.S <cn'Oi iri-jvibe iivitalicd ihthealra/tU. 

is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently, 

with a head wind, (he displayed speed decreases 

and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases. 

•!t c.-i-iiHil I* used in I'ASS'f HKHIC anil S-l'HSS n;i*fe. 

•Only receiver vam! 1-X7 volume t.m he used in 

l

:ASSTesi!2C't' ' 

'Tin- lASSTesil'K.'li 

/ 1/2/ 

< MfiX > 

/ #• 

,-t-RLERT INH 

^THRESHOLD 200kM/h 

•r-v i bes OFF •*-

Prt,»s 11 e St OU !C G 3 r to 

2/2 

, -VRLERT INH 

•••THRESHOLD Skri/h 

i bes OFF 

BELOW the- SET VOKK: 

• Sp&eci ala"' 

!fTHK£SHClD > .• THRESHOLD) 

Alert veiling when speed increases 

1. Set "f ALERT" on the <SPE£-D> screen to ACT. 

Move the cursor to 1NH end touch the RTN 

budon. 

2. Select the ACT mode by sctolling Ihe touch 

3. Touch the RTN button. {To terminate the input 

and return lo the original state, louch the SI 

button.) 

4. The speed o; which an alarm is generated can 

be set by selecting the speed display next lo "f 

THRESHOLD" and touching the RTN bulton. This 

generates an alarm when the speed increases. 

5. A]ust the rate by scroll.n<p ihe touch 

•When ib RTN 

2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the louch 

sensor. 

3. Touch the kTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return lo the originol state, louch the SI 

bulton.) 

4.The soeed at which cn alarm is generated 

can be set by selecling the numerical display 

next to " i THRESHOLD" and touching the RTN 

button. This sounds an alarm when the speed 

decreases. 

5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the louch sensor. 

"iVJieu ibr J(TN JS lojicJieil !W one second, lite r^.'.e is resol 

:u ihs iimiJ value. 

6. Touch the RTN bullon. (To terminate the Input 

and return lo the original stale, touch the SI 

button.) 

4Speed alarm precaution 

6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input 

and return to the original state, touch ihe SI 

button.) 

Alert setting when speed decreases n m "triOVrmVi.« 

.•aches 3<)km/h liie 

cr speeding even jl 

SENSOR Various telemetry si 

This screen registers the telemetiy sensors used 

with the transmitter. When only one of a certain 

type of sensor is used, this selling is- unnecessary 

and Ihe sensor can be used by simply connecting it 

to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter. 

When using 2 or more of ihe same kind of 

sensor, they must be registered here. 

• Select (SENSOR) in the Linkage menu and 

access Ihe setup screen shown below by 

loucning Ihe RTN but 

|W'liat is n slut'?| 

Servos are classified by CH, but sensors are 

classified in units called "slot". There are sluts 

from No. J to No. 31. 

Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data 

sensor units may use multiple slots. 

Using a sensor which uses (wo or more slots, 

the required number of slots is automatically 

assigned by selling up a start slot. 

When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are 

used, the sensors themselves must allocate unused 

slots and memorize that slot. 

( : 3SENSUR —mm 1/? 

i SBS-01T — 

— 

lira 1 ho 

Ot she 2 SBS-01RM/O — 

— 

j 1!cin .. sSBS-Oin — — 

4 SBS-01A 

—• s SBS-01R 

<SensorTouch1H> 

Sensor ID: When multiple sensors at the 

same type are not used, ID is unnecessary. 

2/? 

& INHIBIT 

7 INHIBIT 

sSB3-01G -

sSBS-01G 

10 SBS-01G 

• As snown in the toole below, an altimeter requires 3 contiguous slots 

and a (jP> sensor requires 8 contiguous slots. In addition, since fhe GPS 

(SBS-UiG) slcirl slots ate 8. 16. and 24. slals 6 and 7 are inhibited. 

' Assignable slot > *

AlIli,u"'-'i 

•Depemti: 

splay i largo aaoimi of da:a re<|ui;c1 

. numbers !h»! con be allocked may li 

Siinsof The requnud 

nuiTibcr ol slots Th<! mimbfj; which can bn uswi as a start slot Selling aiea 

iHWr'(f>BS-OiT) t strd 1 - 31 

Global 

RPM(SBS01:<M,SBS01RO) t slot 1 ~ 3t 

Global V'ollaye (S13S-D1V) 2 slola t,2,3,4.5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14.1l>. 17,18,19,20,21, 

7.2.24.25.2<;.U 7,26,20.30 

Global 

Atuuiclii (SfiS-OlA) 3 slots 1 '/J

,;i.4,S,« a. to, 11,12,13,1fi 17.18,1H,20,21,24,2 

6,20.27,28,29 

Global 

fiPSfSRS-Olfil 8 slots 8 ,1 , 2 4 

Global 

TPMP12Ji-Ff713 1 rJnt 1 - 31 

llwopo VARIO-Fl/tS 7. slots 1,»,a,4,li.fi H,«,10,1 1,12, 13,14,16,1MB, 19,20,2 1, 22,24.2S 26,27,25,29.30 llwopo 

VARIO-F1C72 2 slots 1,2,2,4,6,6.8,9,tO,11,12,13,14.16,17,18,19,20,21. 

22.24.25.26.27,28,29,30 

llwopo 

GPS-l"t675 8 blols 8,15.24 

m, -

SENSOR : RF.tXMl> 

When using multiple sensors of the same type 

the sensors must be registered in the transmitter. 

Connect all the sensors to be used to the TI4SG as 

shown in the figure at the right ami register them by 

the following procedure. The ID of each sensor is 

registered in the transmitter. 

• Call paqe 7 by touching the SI bulton 6 times trom 

the ISENSO*! i 

.EHJEWaiMi 7/7 

3iINHIBIT 

RELOAD REL0CRTE 

REGISTER SET SLOT 

Rending nil the sensors to be used 

). Connect all the sensors and receiver 

batteries lo be used to the T14SG through a 

hub as shown in Ihe figure above. 

2. Move Ihe cursor lo "RELORD" on page 7 of 

the [SENSOR) screen. 

3. Touch the R"N button. 

All the sensors are registered and can be 

used. 

SENSOR: REGISTER 

This function registers an additional sensor. 

Conned ihe sensor as shown in the figure at the 

right and register it by the following procedure. 

The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter. 

Additional sensor registration 

1. Connect Ihe sensor and receiver battery 

to be used to ihe TUSG through a hub os 

shewn :

:n the figure at the right. 

2. Move Ihe cursor to "REGISTER" on page 7 of 

the <Sensor> screen, 

3. Touch the RTN bulton. 

The sensor is registered and con be used. 

•When ::ic number ot vkus ncedeid in registration iv 

erfoi led. Disable • 

4ytii 4: 

d slots o e folhiv 

nuMjite t«!urr:fcuy simc typ« 

103 
SENSOR: KLOCATE 

This function secures contiguous unused slots 

by rearranging the registration state when sensor 

registration and deregistration are performed 

repeatedly anil the unused slots aiv fragmented. 

• Coll poae 7 by touching the 51 buiton 6 limes ftom 

fhe (SENSOR) mm ' 

7/7 

31 INHIBIT 

RELOAD RELOCATE 

REGISTER SET SLOT 

Relocate of sensors to be used 

1. Connect all the sensors ond receiver 

batteries to be used to the TI4SG through c 

bub CJS SHOWN in THE fguie above. 

2. Move the cursor to "RELOCATE" on page 7 ol 

tne [SENSOR] screen. 

3. Touch the RTN burton. 

.KNSOlf SET SLOT 

This procedure changes the slot No. of one 

registered sensor. 

Sensor sioi change 

1. Connect the sensor one; receiver battery to 

be changed to the T14SG through a hub as 

shown in the figure above. 

2. Move the cursor to "SET SLOT" on page 7 of 

the <Sensor> scieen. 

3. Touch the RTN button, A sensor cetails screen 

appears. 

4. Move the cursor to "LOAD" and touch the 

RTN button, 

5. The current start slot is displayed. Move the 

cursor to the number of the stQ'f slot and 

change it fo the des'red value. ''Cannot be 

set to o slot that cannot be ollocoted like the 

loble of all pages.) 

6. Wove the cursor to "WRITE" and touch the 

RTN button. 

DATA RESET 

This function is designed lo allow you to reset 

Iriin settings or all of the settings saved in the active 

model memory. You may individually choose to 

reset the following data; 

T1-T4: 

Reset the digital trim setting. 

Mocel memory selling data reset. 

All mtidci setting: 

Resets nil Linkage and Model Menu functions 

except for Frequency, Model Select, Low battery 

voltage, and Mode! Type. 

Mf She Model Type selected 

• Selecl (DATA RESET] in the Linkage menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN buiton. 

TI:U:METKY; 

Reset the telemetry setting. 

DRTft RESET 

T1-T4 

FILL MODEL SETTING 

TELEMETRY 

Data resetting method 

2. Execute reset by touching the RTN button for 

one second. (Touch the SI buiton lo cease 

resetting.) 

(T1-T4): Resets only the TI-T4 

{ALL MODEL SETTING): Resets oli the functions 

in the Linkage menu and Model menu 

except the frequency, model select, ond 

model type -unctions. 

(TELEMETRY): Resets only the leremetry 

functions. 

MODEL.YIKM; (COMMON I'XNCHONSi 

This section describes the D/R, program mixing, 

and other functions common (o all model types, 

Before setting the model data, use the Model 

Type function of the Linkage menu to select the 

model type matched to the aircraft. If a different 

model type is selected afterwards, the I)/R, program 

mixing, and other parameters are reset. 

If either a helicopter or glider have been selected 

as the model type, then the specific functions in the 

Model menu can be set for each (light condition. If 

you want to switch the settings for each condition 

by switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition 

Selecl function to add night conditions. (Up to live 

conditions can be used) 

Note: The T14SG Is designed so thai the airplane 

and gilder {Including EP glider) model types 

are compatible with aircraft of similar type 

wings. 

This section outlines the relationship between 

the functions common to airplanes and 

gfiders, except some dedicated functions, 

and model type. 

The setting menus will depend on the number 

of servos and other differences according to 

the wing type used. The setup screens in the 

instruction manual are typical examples. 

• Access the model menu shewn below by 

touching the MDL button twice at the home 

screen, etc. 

MODEL MENU 

SERVO 

CONDITION 

DUAL RATE 

PROG. MIX 

PIT CURVE 

1/2 

: THR CURVE 

|THR HOLD 

:SWASH MIX 

ITHR MIX 

I PIT->RUD 

• setect the function you 

bulk 

setup screen by touching fhe RIf-l 

Model Menu functions (Common) list 

•SERVO 

Servo lest and servo position display (For a 

description of its functions, see the Linkage Menu 

section.) 

• CONDITION (applicable to helicopter and 

glider selections) 

Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy, 

condition renaming, and condition delay can be set. 

• DUAL. RATF. 

T he D/R curve of a T14SG transmitter may be 

activated from a switch, stick, position, etc. For 

information on how to do so. please refer to tlie 

Switch Setting Method located at the back of this 

manual. 

•PROG. MIX 

The T14SG transmitter allows up to five 

completely customizable program mixes. 

C.X SON Flight condition's switch assignment, copy, priority cnange 

condition delay can be set. [except airplane type) 

This function, in the Vlodei menu, can be used 

to switch the sellings of up to 5 flight conditions. 

Please note this is not applicable lo aitplane type 

selections. 

Note: To prevent accidental activation of any 

unused flight conditions during flight, sel the 

switch setting of those unused conditions to 

null H-

• A Condition Delay function can be set. 

Unnecessary fuselage motion which may be 

generated when there are sudden changes 

in the servo positions and when ihere ore 

variations in the operating fime between 

channels during condition switching. The 

delay con be set for each channel to ensu'e 

maximum performance from your aircraft. 

When setting the delay function for a specific 

flight condition, the related function changes 

olier a delay corresponding ta the set 

amount. 

» if multiple conditions were set, their 

ooerotional priority may be customized as 

desired. 

• Select (CONDITION) at the Model menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN button. 

WHIWIL N0RMSL 1/5 

•NORMAL PRiORtTV 

IDLEUPI SE + 

IDLEUP2 SE + + 

IDLEUP3 SF + + 

HOLD — + 

<sensorTouch'"> 

Condition switch selectioni'deletion 

l.Move the cursot to the switch item of the 

condition you want fo select/delete end 

access fhe switch setup screen by touching 

the RTN button ond select the switch and ON 

direction. 

laftaxi 0 • IQLEiiPl 

(Sew?* Ji',.- Jj 

1. Move the cursor to the (SOURCE) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch fo the dafo 

input mode. 

Select the copy source condition by scroll'ng 

the touch sensor. Thc-n. touch the RTN button. 

2. Move the cursor to the fDESTIN.) item ond 

touch the RTN button. 

Select the copy destination condition by 

scrolling ihe touch sensor. Then, fouch fhe 

RTN button. 

•Thi- il for iltc ci 

3. Move the cuisar to the (COPY) item and 

louch the RTN button. A confirmation 

message appears. 

4. Touch the RTN butlon for one second ond 

the copying is completed. (Touch the SI 

butlon to slop copying.] 

1'riuiity change 

I. Move the cursot to the priority up-arrow or 

down-arrow you v/ant to chcnge ond touch 

the RTN buiton. 

The priority of fhe corresponding condition is 

changed. [The last condition becomes the 

highest priority.) 

•The Normal concilium r..innoi tic dmificcl or muvoi, i;> 
I'M ! '\l R -vrif Tne on^

e onrJ curve each stick function can be set. [All model types] 

Ciimlifioj) delay selling 

1. Select the condition which you want io set. 

2. Move the cursor lo the "DELAY1 icon o' the 

channel you wont to set or.d touch the RTN 

button to switch to the dote input mode. 

Adjust the delay amount by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0 

Adjustment rcnge: 0~27 {maximum deloy) 

3. Touch the- RTN button to end adjustment and 

refuin fo the cursor mode. 

Dual rate function is used to adjust (fa' amount 

uf throw and the operational curve of the stick 

functions {aileron, elevator ami rudder) for each 

flight condition or up to 5 rates for each function, 

for airplane type, it is also possible to adjust the 

operational curve of the throttle function. 

This is normally used after the End Point 

programming r .s been completed to define the 

maximum throw. When mixing is applied irom one 

channel to another channel, both channels can be 

adjusted at the same time by adjusting die operation 

rate through the dual rale fimclioit. 

Neutral position of the dual rate curve can be 

Dual rate curve of I-LA P. FLAP3, mriTliKH.Y, 

and CAMliliK function can be set. (Airplane/ 

Glider) 

•FLAM a/i(I glider »:>!>• 

i'l:«t"LY. .inJ CAMMIR iunclkvii. ' 

' iriJiviilunl V.viith scHiu- is rol allowed in the H.Al'.l'L Af>. 

and BUTTERFLY, C'AMUFR fiincn'ons. (Coiuiilicn 

» Settict (DUAL RATEj at the Model menu and access 

the setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button. • " 

'r'oncuon selection ^ [Airplane 

hints only) 

DUAL RATE 

"AIL 

EXP i +6 +0;^ 

nt '+20 MIA'H 

/H 2 3 4 5 

•Neufiol position 

)CW, Uyiclre! 

L. 

•Switch selection 

[Helicopter/glider] 

:.Ur--L EfiTr 

AIL 100 100 

EXP +0 +0 

NT tEm COND, 

NORMAL 

EDIT NORMAL 

•Condition selection •Condition Mode 

selection 

DURL RRTE -

Fit L 109 100 

EXP +0 +0 

NT +20 

•12 3 4 5 

•Switch mode 

selection 

108 <n«dvi Menu «:« '-•Model Siriui CCcsid 

Dual rate ing procedure 

1. Function selection 

Move tne cursoi tc the (unction selection 

item and touch the RTN button lo switch to 

the data input mode. 

Select the function you wont to adjust by 

scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

Touch the RTN butlori to the cursoi mode. 

2. Switch selection 

Move the cursor to the ciicuif (t item and 

access the switch setup screen by touching 

the RTN button. Select the switch activation 

method and the aclivaHon posUion {if 

applicable). 

' for a itcuiloU description of the sellin; 

Mo;; if(his i iiiiuat. 

3. left/richt (up/down) rote odjuslment 

Move the cursor 1o the rote item you want to 

adjust ond touch the RTN button fo switch lo 

tne data input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 100% 

Adjustment range: Q%~ 1 A0% 

nviir.-i (-io K i'N bMon is :c.:rc;ie<J tor one swinl. the 

Touch the RTN bullon to end the adjustment 

and return lo the cursor mode. 

Repeat this procedure for additional rate 

ana other functions as aesired. 

4. Operation curve {EXP curve) adjustment 

Move the cursor to the EXP item ycu wanl to 

adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the cfofa input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value 0% 

Acijuslmenl range: -tO0"'>-<-100% 

•j. Neutral position adjustment 

M'crtorm Uu- > Wow ;iilcr ch.tngirii; lo (he circuit * or 

co:i(tiiiiiii you \va:n to .uljtis;. 

Move the cursor to the [NT] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch Jo the data input 

mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initio! value: 0% 

Adjusirnent conge: -100?S~+!00?S> 

•When Ihc JITS' bulinn is u>;K'heJ I'.irurn- iev.uut. the neu'.r.il 

Touch the RTN button to the cursor mode. 

ion posi value.) 

IV: 

•tiivt.ux 

with si 

Touch the RTN button to end odjustment and 

return fo the cursor mode. 

Repeat this procedure for oil other rotes and 

functions os desired. 

MIX 

Programmable mixing may be used lo correct 

undesired tendencies of the aircratt, and it may also be 

used for unusual control configurations. Mixing means 

that the motion of a command channel, called the 

"master," is added to the motion of the mixed channel, 

called "slave." 

You may choose io have the Master's trim added to 

the Slave channel response ("Tiim" selling). The mixing 

Program mixing which can be freely customized. ;Jp to five mixings 

can be used for each model. [All model types) 

curve (Linraiv'5-point) can be changed You may select 

Mixing ON/OFF sw itch, control or you may choose to 

have mixing remaining on ali the time. 

The Programmable mixing includes a jxiwerful link 

function, which allows Programmable mixing lo be 

linked with the special mixing functions, or with other 

programmable mixing functions. The link function can 

be set up for Master and Slave channel individually. 

• Select (PROG. MIX] of the Model menu and access 

the setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN bulton. 

ri INH5RIL •>ELE 

2 INHsRIL •>ELE 

3 INHSRIL +ELE 

4 INHs RIL •>ELE 

>5 INHJRIL •>ELE 

i whose function you want io aclivate 

n by touching the RTN button. 

• Mixing rote JLeft/iight. up/down) 

(linear curvi 

1/2­

> ;+0|-

> :+0! 

OFFS 

x :+0; 

v !+0i» 

ttl 

INH 

RIL + 

ELE 

LINEAR 

"f* 

>5 

>4 

• 3 

>2 

>1 

•Curve selection "Offset role(X. >J 

•Switch selection 

# l 

INH 

HIL 

+ 

ELE 

POINT 

T 

1/2-

;+0i 

!+0; 

:+0:H 

:+0: 

:+e!> 

T 

•C'Jtvn selection 

Prog, mix setting procedure 

ate /point 1-5) 

• Activate the function. 

Move the cursor to Ihe {ACTj item ond louch 

tne RTN button to switch to Ihe data input 

mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

•The iti^iUy h!u]):s. 

louch the RIN button to activote the 

function arid return to the cursor mode. 

he funi'don is ailivat;.!. (ON or OFF ci;ph.y) 

•ON/OFF svviu-li 3!1(J mix i;ilc ate nol ,cl even llums-h l'Mc 

'-y.hiiM Shr.V.x (Coui! 
•ON/OFF s»vit«h selling 

Move the cursor to the switch item and 

access the switch setup screen by touching 

(he RTN button and select (he switch ond ON 

direction. 

• Master channel setting 

I. Move ihe cursor to the (MASIt-iR] item ond 

touch the RIN button to switch to the cola 

input mode. 

Select the (unction by scrolling (lie touch 

sensor. 

"Thi! display bluiK* 

Touch 'he fiW butiori to change 'he /'unction 

ond return to the cuiscr mode. 

7. When you wont to link this mixing with other 

mixes, move the cursor to the [UNKj item ana 

touch Die RIN button to switch to the dalo 

input mode. 

Select the link mode, either [+] or [-), by 

scrolling the louch sensor. 

MtnulispUy Winks 

Touch the RTN button to set the In* mode 

and return to the cursor mode. 

• (.pcrj-.ins il.c mi; 

Ih« H 'J^f'1-y -

iliiigly. 

•}i liic RTN hi 

is tune 

• Slave channel scilinjj 

1. Move Ihe cursor lo the [SLAVE] item ond 

touch the RTN button to switch to the- dota 

input mode. 

Select the (unction by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

•The (lisphy Minks. 

Touch the RTN button to change the function 

and return to the cursor rncde. 

2. When you wont jo link this mixing with other 

mixes, move the cursor to the [LINK) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to Ihe data 

input mode. 

Select the link mode to (+] or [-] by scrolling 

the touch sensor. 

*71n; display blinks. 

Touch the RTN button to set the link mode 

and return to the cursor mode. 

• Trim mock* ON/OFF setting 

1. When changing the trim mode, move the 

cursor to the (TRIM) item and touch the RTN 

button to switch lo Ihe dofa input mode. 

Select ON/OFF by scrolling the touch sensor, 

'The tli.sjftay blinks. 

Touch the RTN button to change the 'rim 

mode ON/Orf and return to the cuisor 

mode. 

U"i!W) ii mil ije.siier), jf.Ji'a jon'J. ' 

FTJF.L MIX 

•l-lftcl in the rclia-in. 

• l.innu curve setting 

(Rate setting) 

). Move ihe curse io the mixing rate setting 

item and touch the RIN button to switch to 

the dota input mode. 

Adjust ihe rale by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -100%~+100% 

•When thi! RTN h'j'.um is lojclied lor one second, ihe servo 

u|HT,Uion |ifiM!ion is fCvOt in Ifn; initial value 

Touch the RTN button lo end odjuslment ond 

return to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeot this procedure ?or all other rates as 

desire cf. 

(O'fselting Ihe cuive horizontally In the vertical 

or hoitfonlal direction) 

!. Move the cursor to the 1GFPS] setting item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to tfte 

data input mode. 

Adjust ihe oltsel rale by scrolling the touch 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -100%-+100% 

•When the RTN Iv.iiKiii is touched lor one seeimil. Uie servo 

o(Kra<i,m position is rv>ct w ilir inili.il >aJm.) 

Touch the RTN bulton to end the cdjusiment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeal this procedure tor the other direction. 

• 5-point curve setting 

(Rate setting] 

1, Move ihe cursor to the point rale setting item 

you wont to adjust and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial vofue: OfJ 

Adjustment range: -IGO%~+100% 

•When the RTN button is touched for erne second, die servo 

operation position is reset (,-> the initial value.) 

Touch the RIN button to end ihe cdjustmerii 

and return to the cu'soi mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure for each point as 

desired. 

Dedicated mixing used to adjust Ihe fuel mixture of applicable 

engines, jAirplane/helicopter] 

l is utilized to refine inflight needle 

adjustments of engines tiial oiler mixiure control 

carburetors. 

• Select [FUEL MIXJ at the Model menu ana 

access the seljfc screen shewn below by 

touching the KIN bulton. fA:mlr>no tun 

2/3 

RCT 

MIX 

THR CUT 

IDLE DOW 

INH 

UNMIX 

17x 

0 % 

'•:eiiccpier lypej 

bodoeih NORMAL 1/2 

EDITNORMAL _ C0PV* 

>5+100 X ' 

>4 +50X 

• 3 +0XH 

>2 "50X y 

>i ~100«^ 

H 

INH 

MIX 

IDLLDWITA NORMFIL 2/2 

RCT INH 

MIX MIX 

THR CUT 17 x "1 

HOLD POS. 17 x Jj 

• bny.ne cut setting—» 

Note: Initial settings does not assign fuel mix to 

any channel. Prior to utilizing the Fuel Mix 

settings, select an unused channel on your 

receiver and assign it accordingly for the 

mixture control. Additionally, please make 

sure that your (Control) and [Trim] are set to 

null K 

<SensorTouch*M> 

Needle high trim 

selection 

3/3 

LOW HIGH 

RATE 0X 0 X" 

DUMPING QY. 

RCT POS 25 x 75 x 

< sox> " 

•Accetera'io -

•Mixing curve copy function 

Move the COPY item and touch the RTN 

button to switch to Ihe dalo input mode. 

Select Ihe copy destination condition by 

scrolling Ihe touch sensor and touch the 

RTN button. Select the (YES) end touch 

the RTN button. 

113 

Setting inethud 

MODELMF.NI; (AIRJPLANK/GUDER RjNCTtONS) 

• Activate the function. 

1. Wove Ihe cursor to Ihe JACTj item and touch 

Ihe RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. 

Select tlie ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

•Tiiediylay Wkikv 

Touch the RTN bullon lo activate Ihe 

function ond return to Ihe cursor mode. {ON 

is displayed.; 

2. Move tne cursor to the (MIX) item and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. 

Select the mixing mode you want to change 

by scioll'ng the touch sensor. 

•Tile (iitphy hlhks. 

Touch the RTN buflon Ic change the mode 

and return "o the cursor mode. 

•When [MIX] n -.electa; at ilic [MIX] icon, the Omilltv curve 

d.-.t.i Ili.-O is .set beeotNi* Ihe mix rn.i-'a Wlier. (UNMIXJ is 

• 5-pnint curve setting 

1. Move -he cursor to the point rote selling item 

you want lo adjust and touch Ihe RTH bulton 

to switch to the data input made. 

Adjust Ihe rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment ronge: -1CG%-+10DTO 

•When lite RTN Ir.iuon is touched tor one Second, ihe servo 

Touch the RTN button to enci adjustment and 

return la Ihe cursor mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure 'or eoch point. 

•Needle high trim setting 

1. Move the cursor to the needle high trim 

selection item and access the switch setup 

screen by touching the RTN button. Select 

the needle high trim lever. 

*K« <1 (U'tuildl ,tt"ierip'.ior ol the selling metKxl, sec (Switch 

•SL-tUnj; Metluxlj ,il ihe hack of this 

2. Move the cursor to the TRIM rate item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

Adjust the trim rate by scrolling tne touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment ronge: -3G%-*30% 

Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and 

return to the cursor mode. 

(Work* like ATI. 

•Accdi'i ation s 

.K.colctatiiin fund 

neeUlc/enRmc rise 

ion. This enables an 

,• iiu-roives the needle 

tteiierjleii by sudden throttle slick inpn'.s. 

[Acceleration rate setting (RATE)] 

(Damping rate setting (DUMPING)) 

Move the cuisoi to Ihe rale item you want to 

change and touch the RTN bullon lo switch 

to Ihe dalo input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

"When i!ie RTN b'.i'.toit is touched for one second. ;iie r.ite is 

Touch Ihe RTN bulton lo end cdjusiment and 

return to the cu'jor mode. 

(Operation poinl setting (ACT POS)] 

'The oi'enitioii point .it whieh the acceleration suttiii;! will 

occur. If this poin; is exceeded, acceleration is performed. 

Move the cursor to the (ACT POSj item and 

hold the throttle stick to the position you 

want to change and touch the RTN bulton 

tor one second. 

Note: When using the acceleration function, 

since the needle stroke Is large, adjust your 

settings so there Is no binding of your linkage. 

* inU 

with Ihe ihtutilc liokt function, ihrot'Jc em 

• down liinclioii is possible The throttle eul 

./liiifc-d accordingly. Sel i: to Ifte full cfoncJ 

Move tht! cursor to the throttle cut or idle 

down item and touch the RTN button to 

switch to the data input mode. 

Adjust the servo position by scrolling fhe 

touch sensor, 

Initial value: THR CUT: ! 7%. IDLE DOWN: 0% 

Adjustment ronge: THR CUT: 0-50%, KHK 

DOWN: 0-100% 

reset to the initial v<tluc.) 

Touch the RTN button lo end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

The dedicated mixes, etc. ih;ii arc applicable 

when an aiqilane or glider model type is selecied 

are displayed in (his Model menu functions 

section. Prior to adjusting any of these mixes, etc. 

use ihe Model Type function in the Linkage menu 

to select ihe model type, wing type, and tail type 

matched (o the aircraft. Other settings reset the 

dala used in mixing function, etc. 

For glider, many dedicated mixes can be set 

for CiicJr /lijjhi condition, as required. 7<> switch 

the sellings for each condition by swilch or stick 

• Access Ihe model menu stK^ 

touching the MDl button twice 

screen, el 

posiiion, use Ihe Condition Select function to add 

flight conditions. (Up to five conditions can be 

used) 

Noto: Trrn TUSG is designed so thai Ihe c^mlono 

and glider model l/pes c.ari utit,ze arcrafl of tne 

same wing tyoe. ^ ^ 

ihe e)C!!ption o' son-,; oea^oted turctior-i. are 

wriHen without regard lo Ihe model type. 

While tr.ere may be dWerences. depe^amcj on ihe 

RIURNBLV of JDIVOS, etc. the WING lyoe used. clc. Ihe 

seli;[) screens in ihe instr'jclicr. rranual are lypicol 

examples 

-n below by 

at Ihe home 

•The fklel 

MODEL MENU 1/2 

i THR DELfiV 

i RIL DIFF. 

: FLfiP SET. 

; HIL^CMBFLP 

:flIL->RUD 

MODEL MENU 2/2 

CAMBER MIXISNRP ROLL 

ELE+CHMBER| AIRBRAKE 

CMBFLP^ELE I FUEL MIX 

RUD+AIL ; GVR0 

RUD+ELE : MOTOR 

<4er»sorTouch",i> 

• Select Ihe function 

you want to set and 

access the selup 

screen by touching 

Ihe R*N button. 

Model Menu functions list 

PITCH cuim: 

Compatible with VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller) 

function. (Airplane, general] 

THR CURVE 

THR curve function adjusts the ihiotde operation 

curve for optimum engine speed to throttle stick 

movement. [Airplane/glider, general! 

THR DELAY 

THR-DF.I.AY function is used lo slow ihe 

response of the throitle stick lo simulate Ihe slow 

response of a turbine engine, etc. [Airplane, 

general] 

AIL DIFFEREN TIAL 

The left and right aileron differential can be 

adjusted independently. For glider, ihe differential 

rate in butterfly mixing can be adjusted. 

[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more] 

FLAP SETTING 

The up/down travel of CJCII flap can be adjusted 

independently tor each seivo according lo ihe wing 

type. (Airplane/glider, 2 flaps or more] 

AIL to CAMB.KLP 

This mix operates the camber flaps in the aileron 

mode. It improves Ihe roll axis characteristics. 

[Airplane/glider. 2 ailerons •> ?, flaps or more] 

AIL to BRKFLP 

This mix operates the brake Haps in the aileron 

mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics. 

{Glider, 4 Haps] 

14 iChCJ i \k! I t 115 
AIL to RUI) 

This mix is used when you wanl lo coordinate 

iho rudder wiih aileron operation lot banking at 

shallow angles. (Aiqihine/giider. general) 

RL'D lo AIL 

This lunctiim is used when you want to mix 

the ailerons with rudder input. Rudder is applied 

during rolling maneuvers such as knile edge flight, 

f Airplane/glider, general} 

CAMBER MIX 

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the 

elevators, f Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or morel 

KLE to CAMBER 

This mix is used when you want lo the mix 

camber flaps with elevator lo increase the lid of the 

model. fAirplanc'glider, 2 ailerons or more) 

CAMB.FLP to KLE 

This mix is used to correct for changes in attitude 

when the camber flaps are utilized. [Airplane/ 

glider, 2 aileions t- ! Ilap or more) 

BUTTERFLY (Crow) 

This function is used to quickly slow the aircraft 

and,'or reduce the altitude. [Glider, 2 ailerons or 

more (Hying: 2 ailerons + 1 (lap or mote)} 

TRIM MIX 

The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset rale 

can be accessed by selecting a switch or condition 

selection us desired. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more] 

AIRBRAKE 

This function is used when airbrakes are 

nec essary when landing or when diving, etc. during 

llighi. (Airplane, 2 ailerons or more) 

GYRO 

This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro 

is used. [Airplane/glider, general] 

V-TAII, 

This function incorporates the elevators and 

rudder input for use with V-iail models. fAitplane/ 

glider, V-lail specifications] 

AILEVATOR (DUAL ELEVATOR) 

This function adjusts (he elevators and ailerons 

of models with elevator specifications. (Airplane-' 

glider, aiievator specifications) 

WINCIM' 

This function adjusts the le(\ and right rudders 

of winglct models. [Airplane/glider, winglet 

specifications] 

MOTOR 

This function adjusts the operation speed when 

the motor of an 1

;5B or other such HI' glider is 

stalled by a switch. [Airplane/glider, general] 

RUD to ELE 

This function is used to correct roiling maneuver 

such as, knife edge tiight. [Airplane, general] 

SNAP ROLL 

This function selects the snap roll switch and 

adjusts the amount of servo input. Servo speed can 

also be adjusted, fAirplane general] 

116 >?«:!!!} 

PIT CURVE (Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general 

This function adjusts the pitch curve for VPP 

(Variable Pitch Propeller) airplane. 

» Select {PIT CURVE) •! Ihe Model menu 

and occe-ss fhe setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button. 

>5+100 <100 

>4 +50 

>3 +0 

>2 "50 

• 1-100 

T 

NOTE: When VPP is not assigned to any 

channel, the pilch curve Is not displayed In 

Ihe mode! menu. In Ihls case, assign VPP to 

any channel on the function screen. 

<SensorTouch'M> 

•VIM'condition selection 

1. Move Ihe cursor to Ihe # bullon at the top 

right side of the screen and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Select *ne VPP condition by scrolling the 

louch sensor. 

•The dwjilay hin.V.s 

Touch the RTN button to coll Ihe setting 

screen ond return to the cursor mode. 

2, Move the cursor to the switch item and 

touch the RIM buffon fo access ihe selection 

screen. Select the switch, and se 1 its ON 

direction. 

Set the VPP condition 2 and 3 switch. 

•The Vl'l1 ccm.iiuons can .itso he chocked i:i Ihe HOMM 

TL 02:06,8E 

72 03:08.06 

»MCH " HE1 

•5-puint curve setting 

[Curve rate setting] 

1. Move the cursor fo the curve rate setting 

Mem you want lo cdjust and touch Ihe RTN 

button lo witch lo the dotci input mode. 

AOjusi i-tu rate by scrolling ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: Ci%~ 100% 

•When the KTN bullon is toJvhe.i for 0:1c second, the r.r.e is 

res el 10 the initial val-.ie. 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and relurn to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeal this procedure lor each poinl. 

[Moving curve point] 

1. Move the cursor So Ihe curve pcinl setting 

item you want Id adjust end toucn ihe RTN 

button to switch to tne data input mode. 

Adjust Ihe curve point by scrolling the touch 

serisot. 

Initial value: PI: |0%], P2: 25%, ?3: 50%, P4: 

75%, PS: (100%) 

Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of Ihe 

adjoining point 

•When liie kJN' h;iUuii is lu.iche.t li.r one second, liie cune 

"ouch the RTN button to end ihe adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure for eacn point. 

[Deleting/returning curve point) 

Move the cursor to the curve point setting 

item you want to delete/return and louch 

Ihe RTN button for one second. 

\tcaii'vAivJ.t:li 11? 

IR CURVT. [Conesponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general 

This funclion adjusts the throttle curve for 

optimum engine speed from throttle stick input. 

•When llirot'.Iv curve is sol 10 ON when there is no throttle 

fiintliwi; Ihis eurvc dels AS ilie motor function. 

IR DELAY [Corresponding model type): Airplane, general 

THR-DKLAY funclion is used lo slow lhe 

response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow 

response of a turbine engine, etc. 

•This funclion is liie wutcasTHR ofvjrvo sjv.xt. If it veix up 

in ye;il numheis, il overlaps and a Tliit serw becomes I.Ce 

furiher. Please do not lei me overlap. Use cither. 

• Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu 

and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the R1N button. 

NOTE: If Ihls throttle curve function is activated, 

you can not use Ihe THR-EXP function within 

the DUAL RATE function simultaneously. 

I • «rr TNH 

.e MoJei >5 100.0 <100 5-1 f f 

>4 75.0 75.0 / 

ultcn is 

• 3 50.0 50,0 1—7 

>£ 25.0 25.0 / 

>1 0.0 < 0 V L ' 

r ~T 

• Select [THR DtlAY) al Ihe Model menu 

ond access Ihe setup screen s'nown 

below by touching the RTN button. 

<SensorTouch'M> 

• Activate (he function. 

1. Move the cuisor 1o Ihe (ACT] item and louch 

the RTN button lo switch to the data input 

mode. 

Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

•The «lihpt:.y blinks 

Touch the RTN buiion to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode. 

• 5-poinl curve setting 

(Curve rate setting] 

I. Move the cursor to the curve rale setting 

item you want to adjust end touch the WIN 

bullon to switch lo Ihe data input mode. 

Adjusl the rate by scrolling -he touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment rcnge: 0%-lG0% 

•When lite RTN fauuon is l.vjclial fur o:ie second, the rj'.e is 

item you wanl to udjusl and touch- the RTN 

butlon to switch to the cfala inpuf mode. 

Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initiol value: Pi: (0%), P2: 25%, P3: 50%. P4: 

75%. PS: (100%) 

Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the 

adjoining pcinl 

position is rc>ei 10 ihe initial value.) 

Touch Ihe RTN button to end Ihe adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure tor each point. 

[Deleting/returning curve point] 

Move the cursor to 'he curve point setting 

item you wanl to delete/return and touch 

the RTN button for one second. 

Touch. Ihe SIN bulton lo end the adjustment 

arid feturn to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeal this procedure for eoch point. 

[Moving curve point] 

1. Move the cursor to the cu've point setting 

Selling method 

• Operation speed (dehtv) selling 

l.Move the cursor to the [DELAY] item end 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

inpuf mode. 

Adjust the delay rate by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0 

Adjustment range:C~27 (maximum delay) 

•When e RTS' h d for 0: 

Touch the RTN button to activote the 

function and return to the cursoi mode. 

118 (;\i? iiirS::!' 1 is iif.i \U-mi -Olithrr 119 
Ail, i>ii«"i« [Corresponding model type): Airplune/glider. 2 ailerons or more 

The lefi and right aileron differential can be 

adjusted independently. 

For »li<kr, die differentia! rate in butterfly mixing 

van be adjusted. 

» Select (AIL DIFF.) at Hie Model menu 

and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the KIM button. 

(MsinAlcron! 

All. 3 {Ch.p Aileron) All.-. (Chip Aileron) 

lAirplcne (2A+2F)) 

[:lf iH3J< 

.-•ids on ihe Model Type. 

<jensorTouch,u> 

LEFT 

OIL 100 X 

RIL2 100 X 

RIGHT 

100 X 

100 x 

(Gfder {4A+2FJ) 

t;llM»liaai NORMAL 

LEFT 

AIL 100 X 

fiIL£ 100 X 

ft IL3 100 x 

ftIL4 100 X 

RIGHT 

100 X 

100 H 

100 X 

100 X 

BUTTERFLV ftDJUST +0X 

Setting method 

• Aileron left/right adjustment 

Move ihe cursor to the aileron {AIL) 1 -4 lefi (or 

right) setting item and touch 'he RTN button 

to switch to ihe data input mode. 

Adjust Ihe a'-)eron angles by scrolling the 

touch sensor when the stick is moved to the 

le-t (or right) end. 

Initial value: iOD% 

Adjustment range: CM20% 

•When the RTN button is uueliud for OIK- second, die >,.U- is 

reset In Iric initial value.) 

Touch the 3TN button to end I he adjustment 

one; return to the cursor mode. 

• Aileron differentia! adjustment in butterfly 

mixing 

Mo« the cursor to the (BUTTERFLY ADJUST) 

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the data Input mode. 

Adjust the dilfereniiol rate by scrolling Ihe 

touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -120—H 20% 

•Wiivn the RTN button is touched for one second. the rjto is 

reset ui ihe initial value.) 

(ouch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

arid return, lo the cuisor mode. 

120 : 

LAP SKT [Coiresponding model type): Airplane/glider. 2 (laps or nice 

The up/down travel of each flap (camber Haps: 

FI.P1/2, brake Hups: FLP3/4) can be adjusted 

independently for each servo according to the 

wing type. 

• Tno operotinn iefi?ianc.e point of ecjcft (top can be 

oftset 

The camber flaps of 

be mixed with the brake 

CMBFLP) 

• An ON/Orr '.v/ilch < 

i 4-flap model can 

flaps. (BRKFLP to 

» Select [FLAP SET.) at ihe Model >r-< 

screen shown biilow by touching 'i 

^

r

' u T" 7 

/b,s:A8, 

\ " FLP 4 \ 

(Bioke flcp)\ 

(C.si'iberFlspl iCambcrflap] 

SGtup sc.-een (K-pciuls on 

<sensorTouch 

CAMBER FLAP 

FLftP FLP2 

UP +100 X +100 X 

DOWN +100 X +100 X 

OFFSET +0X +0X 

4* 

2/3 

BRAKE FLAP INH 

FLP3 FLP4 

UP + 100X +100 X 

DOWN +100 X +100 X 

OFFSET +0 X +0X 

Setting method 

• Flap up/down adjustment 

Wove the cursor to ihe flop (Fi.P) 1-4 Uo or 

Down item occording to the wirg type ond 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. Adjust the travel independently 

by scrolling ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: •» 100% 

Adjustment range: -120+120% 

•When the KIN billion is kv.iclu\l Tor one s.-toini. the rate is 

reset !o the initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the cdjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

• Reference point adjustment 

Move the cunor lo the [OFFSElj item and 

touch the RTN button to switch fo trie doia 

input mode. Adjust the operafion reference 

point of each flap by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

IftsrNORMftL 

BRKFLP + CMBFLP 

3/3 

UP +100 ftCT INH 

DOWN +100 SW — 

OFFSET +0 

Adjustment range: -100—+100% 

•When ihe RTN bullon is touched for <>:ie second, the 

reference point is reset lo the initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return lo the cursor mode. 

• Activate the Brake FLP to Camber FLP mixing 

Move the cursor to the (ACT) item and touch 

ihe RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. Select Ihe ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch senso'. 

•The display Winks. 

Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cuisor mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

To select a switch, move the cursor to the 

(SW) item ond touch Ihe RTN button Io call 

the selection screen. Select the switch and 

set its ON diiedion. (Always ON atsetting! 

•l-nr description of the switch selection n-.olW, see Ihe 

Mi, l.<! CVIBFtl' [Ccnesponding model type): Airplane/glider, 2 ailerci 

This mix operates (lie camber flaps (l-LPf/2) 

in the aileron mode. When ihe aileron stick 

is manipulated, Hie ailerons and camber flaps 

perform aileron operation simultaneously to 

significantly improve the roll axis. 

• Ihe oileron lelt/riyht mixing rale of each top servo 

con bs independently adjusted. 

• An ON/OFF switch con be set. 

• Unking is possible: l>.< thU mix to other mixes. 

» Select (AIL to CMBFl?) at the Model 

menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching fhe RTN 

button. 

r 

ienu by 'O'jc 

IN button. 

OME/EX1T t 

« Adjustment of ea 

flap servo 

FIIL+CMBFLP 

•n depends o:i the model lyjv:. 

XI 

LEFT RIGHT 

FLftP +0 X +0 X 

^FLP2 +0 X +0 X 

^RCT INH 

SW — 

LINK INH 

<Senso[Touch"" 

• Activate (lie ftinciiun 

Move the cursor to the (ACT) item one touch 

the RTN button to switch to Ihe dote input 

mode. Selecl the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

*'( he display blinks. 

Toucn the RTN bun to ac ate Ihe 

and return to the cursor mode. (ON 

is d'splayed.) 

When, selecting a switch, move the cursor to 

the (SW) item ond touch Ihe RTN button to 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 

and set its ON direction. /Always ON at 

setting) 

"for a description of die swiich selection iiicihod. see the 

• Mixing rate adjustment 

Move the cursor io Ihe Hop (FLP] 1-2 left 

or right item according to the wing type 

and touch fhe RfN button fo switch fo the 

do'o input mode. Adjust the mixing rote 

independently by scrolling Ihe touch sensor, 

tnilioi value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -120~+I20% 

"When she KTN bxum is touched lor one second, ihe uu.- is 

reset to itio initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return !o the cuisor mode. 

• I.ink mode seKin^ 

When linking a mix. move the cursor lo the 

[LINK) item and touch the RTN button to 

switch to the dato input mode. Select fhe 

ON mode by scrolling Ihe iouch sensor. 

•Tiltf display Winks. 

Touch the RfN bufJon fc set fhe link mode 

and return, to the cursor mode. 

122 ""''•i'lii I'ur, 

.to BKAKIiS-'LP 

This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/-J) 

in the aileron mode. When the aileron slick is 

manipulated, the aileron and brake flaps perform 

fhe aileron operation simultaneously and the roil 

axis is improved. 

» The oileron left ond riglv mixing roles con be 

ad.'jsted scpaia-ely fa each flap seivo. 

• Mixing during (light c«n be lurned ON/OFF by 

setting a switch. ;ANvays ON ot (--; sotting] 

• Linking con be set; link this mix to other mi»es. 

g model type]: Glider, 4 

ft 

(Main (Wei 

. ilL 3 (Chip Aileron) 

(Wan -iifeiunl 

AlL 4 (Chip Aikron) 

. Selecl (AIL to BRKFLP) ot the Model 

menu and access Ihe setup screen 

shown bolow by touching the RTN 

outton. 

KOM£/EXIt l>ul; 

! aAIL^BRKFLP NORMftL 

Mocicl LEFT RIGHT 

tiif-fj !he ' ^FLP3 +0 X +0 X 

ulVon^y FLP4 +0 X +0 X 

'ACT INH 

sw — 

LINK INH 

• Adjustment of each 

flop servo 

SetfitiK method 

• Activate the function 

Move the cursor to the -ACT) item ond touch 

the RTN button to switch to the dote inpul 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling ihe 

touch sensor. 

*7he (lis;;).'))' blinks. 

Touch the RTN bullon io activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

When setting a switch, move the cursor to 

the (SW) item and Iouch the RTN button 

to access the selection screen. Selecl the 

switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON 

a!"-" selling) ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 

• Mixing rate adjustment 

Move the cursor to Ihe flop (R.P) 3-4 ieit or 

right item and touch the RTN buison to switch 

to the data input mode. Adjust ?he mixing 

rate independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -120—+120% 

•When the RTN Initio;! is touched for one second, die r.ile is 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return lo Ihe cursor mode. 

• Link mode senilis 

To activcte the mixing, move the cursor to 

the (LINK] item ond touch the RTN button to 

switch to Ihe dato input mode. Select the 

ON mode by scrolling fhe touch sensor. 

• The disphiy Winks 

Touch ihe RJN button to set the iink mode 

end return lo the cu'sor mode. 
AH', ro RUB [Ccaesponc'.ng mode! lypej: Airplane/glider, gencol iil-'i.) fit Ml, jCorresponoing model iype): Airplane/glider, general 

Us.e this mix when von want to mix the rudders 

wiih aileron operation. Tliis allows I ho aiiaall to 

bank a steep angle. 

* Mixing doling flight can be turned ON/OFF by o 

Wrtlch. {Always ON a! (••] setting) 

• l'he iTiix.ng rates can be adjusted. 

setup screen shown below by 

touching the RTN button. 

LEFT RIGHT 

+0X +0X 

fiCT INH 

su — 

<$ensotTouch"'1: 

This function is used when you want to mix 

the ailerons with rudder input. It is used when 

rudder is applied during roll maneuvers such 

as, knife edge (light, it can lx- used to turn or 

bank scale models, large models, etc. like n fullsize aircraft. 

• Mixing during flight con be tuned ON/OFF by 

selling <; ;v/.'fcr'. 'Always ON at [—• 

• Linking can be set: U 

• The rrvxing rate con alio 

» Ai-D'jin-c^ivs can be S' 

this : to olh'?' mixes, 

ousted. 

3; oVptu.'iii model type. 

> Select (RUD to AlL| al the Model 

menu ond access the selup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN «ilii 

button. 

. r lamram rct INH— 

> +0< + 100)LINK INH 

• +0 +0 

<SensofTouch'i< 

> +0<-100> 

Tlu' .u-Ui.tl screen depends 011 Ihe 

<> S'1-* 

Setting method 

Setting method 

• Activate the function 

Move Ihe cursor to the (ACTJ item one touch 

the RtN button to switch to the data input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

•Till" disj'ljv blinks. 

Touch the RTN button to activate the 

tuncfon ond return to ;he cursor mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 

the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to 

col! the selection screen. Select the switch 

ond set its ON direction. {Alwcys ON at" 

setting) 

•Mixing rate adjustment 

Move the cursor to the left or right item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data inpu" mode. Adjust the mixing rate 

independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initio! value: 0% 

Adjustment ronge: -ICO—<• 100% 

•When She KTN b-j'.Um is touched lor one second. '.lis Mte is 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

•Activate the futiaion 

Move the cursor to the fACT] item and touch 

ihe RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. Select Ihe ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

•TI10 display blinks. 

Touch Ihe RTN button lo activate the 

function and return lo the cursor mode. {ON 

is displayed.) 

When setting 0 switch, move the cursor to 

ihe {SW] item and touch the RTN button to 

coll Ihe selection screen. Select the switch 

and set its ON direction. (Always ON ot 

setting) 

of ill 

• Mixing rate adjustment (glider) 

Move the cursor lo the !eft or right item 

end touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate 

independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment ronge:-100-+100% 

•When ihc KTN button is loathed for one second, the ru'.e is 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

• Link mode setting 

To activate the link mixing, move ihe cursor 

to the [LINK) item and iauch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode. Select the 

ON mode by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

k mode 

CA.vmF.R .MIX [Corresponding mode! type]: Airplane/gi'der, 2 ailerons 0 

• 5-point curve setting (airplane) 

[Curve ro'e setting) 

1. Move Ihe cursor to Ihe curve rale setting 

item (left side) you wont to adjust and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Adjustment range: -100%-+100% 

•When Die RVN iniuoii is touched tV-r 0:10 second, die rale 1-

Teuch the S'TN button to end Ihe adjustment 

ond return to the cursor mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure for each point. 

(Moving curve point) 

1. Move the cursor to "he curve point setting 

item you wan' to adjust and touch the RTN 

button to switch to Ihe dalo input mode. 

Adjust the curve point by saotfng the touch 

Adjustment range: Up to 2,5% 

adjoining point 

'When ihe KTN bjlloti is touched lor on 

1 front of Ihe 

Touch the RTN bulton to end the adjustment 

and return to 'he cursor mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure for each point. 

(Deleting/returning curve point) 

Move the cursor to the curve point setting 

ttern you want to delete/return and touch 

the RTN button lot one second. 

This function adjusts ihe rate of camber 

operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber 

flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive 

directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rales 

can also be adjusted independently and attitude 

changes caused by camber operation can be 

corrected. 

• Select (CAMBER MIX) at Ihe Model 

menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

button. 

• The up/csown rates of the oileron. t|cp. and 

elevator seivos ten be adjusted. When the mix'ng 

di/ectio.-i is reversed by the: linkage, adjustments 

can be made by changing Ihe untying rate 

polarity (+ o' -). 

• Mixing during flight can be turned ON/CHf by 

sertlr-g a switch. (Always ON ot (-) setlingl 

• A condition delay con bo set. A cul twitch which 

can fs;rn Off Ihe delay function can be 

•Aileron rote 

odjustmenl 

Miiapdi-jn NORMAL 

RRTE1 RHTE2 : 

FLOP +0 K +0X 

FLP2 +0K +0K 

• Elevator rote -

adjustment 

RATEi 

+0 X +0X 
Selling method 

• AvtivaU- (he function 

Move the cursor to the [ACT) item and touch 

the J?I'M button to switch to the dale input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by stioiling the 

touch sensor. 

•7tie display blinks. 

Touch the RTN buiion to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

When setting o switch, move the cursor to 

the jSWj iiem and touch 1he RTN button to 

coll the selection screen. Select the switch 

and set its ON direction. (Always ON at 

selling) 

• Condition delay sctiing 

Move the cursor to the JCOND.DHAY) item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data input mode. Adjust the condition delay 

by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0 

Adjustment range: 0-27 

Touch Ihe RTN button to end the adjustment 

one return to the cursor mode. 

When setting o cut switch, move the cursor 

to the [CUT-SWj item and touch the RTN 

button to <;eeess the selection screen. Select 

the switch and se> its ON direction. (Always 

ON olsetting) 

•Tor a description of llie switch selection rocliuul, see Ihe 

description .'it ihe b:ic!< iif ;l>is ii;a:iuol. 

• Rate adjustment 

The rates ore adjusted by accessing the 

aileron, flap. and clovolor rote screens. 

Move the cuisor to the rotel 01 rate2 

ilem and touch the RTN button to switch 

to the data input mode. Adjust the rate 

independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -ICO- HOO% 

re-.ei liiil.e initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the odjustmeiv 

and return to the cursor mode. 

ELK IttCAiMltKP 

This function is used when you want to inix the 

camber Ibps wilh elevator operation. When used, 

(lie flaps are lowered by up e 

• Select (1:IE to CAMBES) at the Mode! 

and access the setup screen shown : 

bv loucn'ng the RTN button. 

(Corresponding model type;: Airplane/glider. 2 ailerons o

f mo'e 

• In-ftghf rn-Ving tea be turned OS/CFF by asigirr.g 

Ihis to c switch. (Always ON at (-) selling) 

• The mxng rot<; con be adjusted. 

• the point thai has iitlle effect neor the neutral 

position o' the elevator stick can be adjusted. 

(G!:der only) 

:Vafc: Tfic elevator «n the (ai)kas wing "'it siJso 

he effected when this mix is activated. 

•, ami I ill i 

Mixing rale adjustment 

Move tne cursor to the up or down mixing 

rote item for each servo and touch the RTN 

button to switch to ffie dafa input mode. 

Adjust the rcie independently by scrolling 

the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -100--+100% 

•When llie RTN button is louche;! for one second, liie r.ite is 

resel ui Ihe initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

end return io the cursor mode. 

Setting method 

• Activate Ihe function 

Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch !o ihe data input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

When setting a switch, move the cursor to 

the |SWJ item end touch the RTN button to 

cell the sekictiun screen. Select the switch 

and set its ON direction, (Always ON at 

setting) 

;np:n>: iebaikofl! 

• Range setting (Glider only) 

Move the cursor to 'he (RANGE) item and 

hold the elevator stick to the desired position 

(upper or lower side) ond then touch Ihe RTN 

button for one second to set the range. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: 0-100% 

•'Motid Men*:; Aivjjbuc.C 

CMBFiJHo IX: [Conesponding model type): Atrpfane/glider, 

2 ailerons + I flap or more 

When the camher/speed Haps are utilized, 

the aircraft might experience, a change in pitch. 

This mix compensates for such changes by 

incorporating elevator input. 

• The elevator servos up/down ra'es con be 

adjusted sepcraielv. If the mixing direction is 

revet sod. change the: rale polanty (4 or-). 

• Mixing dining ffignt con oe turned ON/OFF by 

selling a switch. (Always ON at [-} setting) 

tUVAlOH XitUVAIOfU (U.VAIOK [UVA10R2 

« Select [CMBFl? to ELE] at the Mode! menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN button. (GliJor. turreml>. s 

by roue 

RTN button. 

J IPMRFI P*FI PHHHH 

••• RRTE1 RATES is Model | 

ELE 

i 

+0X +0X 

ACT INH 

— 

sw — 

• E I e v a t o 

cKijuslmec 

ecleil camlilion name) 

<SensorTouchTM> 

Setting method 

• Activate (In; function 

Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

•Tlie display blinks. 

Touch Ihe RTN but'on to activate the 

function ond return to the cursor mode. (ON 

is deployed.) 

When setting a switch, move the cursor to 

Ihe (SW| item and touch the RTN button to 

call the selection screen. Select Ihe switch 

and set its ON direction. (Always ON at 

setting) 

M.-b.vkofL'i. 

Wi, << 

•Mixing rate adjustment 

Wove the- cursor to the RATE) or RATE2 item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

data input mode. Adjust trie mixing rate 

independently by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

Initial values: 0% 

Adjustment ronge: -120--+120% 

•Wlieii lliu RTN buiion is IcuiM lor out scvoikl. she idle is 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

anci return to the outsat mode. 

Biyi:j£Rbi.,Y {Corresponding mod( 

Flying: 2 ailerons ' ' * 

ailerons or more 

This function is utilized io quickly slow ihe 

aircraft and reduce aliiiude by .simultaneously 

raising ihe le 11 and right aiierons and lowering the 

(Taps (camber flap, brake llap). 

Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely 

efficient landing configuration by accomplishing 

ihe following: 

1. Slow fhe aircraft's velocity. 

2. Provide washou! at the wing tips Io reduce 

the tendency to tip stall. 

:apo 

3. Create mere lift toward the center o( Ihe 

wing allowing it to fy al a slowe' speed 

• Mixing during (light car. be turned OH/OFF by 

soiling o switch. (Always ON ot [-} jratlinc;) 

• The point ot which Ihe beMedly operation 

reference po'nt can be offset. 

• Ihe opeialiunof spued o! the oile'ons and flaps 

con be odj-jsleci. 

• The differential rote can be adjusted. 

of ilte 

dilVer. ;it tunc 

• Select laUTTER-lV) ot the Modei menu 

and access Ihe setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button. 

•Aileron/flop rate 

adjustment 

NORMAL 1/3 

in**TM, INH 

!rg the ft IL +0 % RIL2 +0 % 

ftIL3 +0 % RIL4 +0 X 

V PLRP +0X FLP2 +0X 

BUTTERFLV NOR 

ELE + 100X 

1-100 < 0) 

<5ensorTouch'M> 

•Elevator adjustment 

NORMAL 3/5 

ACT INH SPEED _ 

sw — fill- 0 

FLAP 0 

OFFSET 15 ELE 0 -

< 49% > 

• Servo speed setting 

•Buhe'f!y operation reference point 

\U-hh 131 
TRIM MIX [Corresponding model type]: Glider. 2 ailerons or more 

•Activate fin- fuiicliiiti 

Move- the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch 

the RTN bulton to switch :c the date input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

*'i in- ilisphy blinks. 

Toucn Ihe RTN bullon to activate 1h«j 

function and return lo 'he cursor mode. (ON 

is displayed.] 

When setting a switch, move Ihe cursor to 

the [SWJ ite:m ond touch Ihe RTN button to 

coil the selection screen. Select the switch 

and set its ON direction. (Always ON ot 

setting) 

:ni tliisi nuial. 

• Rate adjustment 

Move ihe cursor to the aileron, flop or 

elevolo' rale ilem end touch Ihe RIN button 

to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the 

rate Independently by scrolling Ihe touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -200—* 200% IBavalcc 

-I20~+:2C%) ' 

touch the 37N button to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

j / J / /(Brake /-Flap' L\ \ \ (BrikeFlaplX \ \ 

/ (Msm Aileron) 

'• All 5 

(Chip AIICIUTI; 

• Elevator compensation curve adjustment 

Output (YJ Position ('X) 

Oftse! point fixed iQJ Rxed loltset 

OOS;tion) 

2- lnle>niedio!e point Sei'cibki Setloblf; 

I- End point Seitobte Tiyetj 

•When iifi-

•Refevenc 

iihtinli/cO. 

point adjustment 

Move the cursor to the jOFFSCT] item ond 

hold Ihe airbrake slick to the desired position 

and then touch the RTN button tor one 

second to set the butterfly operational 

reference pcinl. 

Iniliol value: 0% {upper side) 

Adjusirnenl range: 0-100% 

Servo speed selling 

Move the cursor fo fhe aileron, I lap or 

elevator speed item ana' touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0 

Adjustment range: 0-27 (maximum delay) 

Touch the RTN button to activate the 

Sanction ond return lo the cursor mode. 

ELEVATOR aCVATOJI 

This function adjusts the trim ollsci rates of the 

ailerons, elevators, and Haps (camber (laps, brake 

(laps) according to the flight status. 

As iin example this function can be set up for 

launching, with speed (laps ami ailerons drooped, 

ami .r slight umouM of op elevator. ;iml am he 

used for high speed flying, with both microns and 

speed ilaps rellexed slightly, and a bit of down 

elevator. 

To pirvenj sudden trim dunces when switching 

(light conditions, :i delay can be set lo provide a 

• Select {TRIM MIX] at the Model menu 

and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN but' 

smooth transition between the two conditions. It 

is als'o possible to program a cut .switch which 

will turn oil'ihe delay. 

Furthermore, you can set the auto switch, which 

will link the trim mix to a stick, switch, or dial. 

Additionally, (he speed of (lie aileron, elevator, 

and flap servos can be adjusted. 

fliffilWfil NOrtMftL RMFl U2 

RIL3 RIL RIL2 RIL4 INH 

+0 +0 +0 +0 

FLAP FLR2 

+0 +0 

ELE +0 

<»erisorTouch'"> 

• Condi-ion defcry 

selling 

HaifiBSIM NORMAL 2/2 

RCT IHH -- SPEED 

COND.DELRV 

CUT-SW " 

RUTO-SW ~ 

RIL 

FLfiP 

ELE 

> Aile'ons. flops, and 

elevators servo speed 

setting 

•Aofo switch selection 

AlHBRAK.lv [Corresponding model type): Airplane. 2 ailerons crmore 

Setting mi-thud 

• Activate the function 

Move the cursor to the {ACT) item and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the date input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

to: ::h si 

'The ihspi.ty tilink.v 

Touch the RTN bullon to activate ihe 

function end return lo ihe curso< mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

When setting a switch, move the cursor to 

the switch item arid touch the RTN button 

to access the selection screen. Select the 

switch end set its ON direction. JAiwoys ON 

otsetting) 

•Trim offset rate adjustment 

Move I tie cursor lo the aileron, flap or 

elevate rale item ond touch the RTN butlan 

to switch to the data input mode. Adjust Ihe 

rate independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -25Q~t 250% 

"When ill.' RTN luiltofl is touched lor mit- srfoad, the rate is 

I value/ 

• Condition delay setting 

Move the cursor to the [CONC.DElAYj item 

ond touch the RTN button to switch to the 

doia input mode-. Adjust the condition delay 

by scrolling the touch sensor. 

(n:(io( value: 0 

Adjustment range: 0-27 

'When ihe RTN button is toudie.l lid, iho < 

ic.i 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

Wrien setting a cut switch, move the cursor 

to the (CUT-SW] item and louch the RTN 

bullon to access the seleclion screen. Select 

the switch ond set its ON direction. JAiwoys 

ON ctsetting! 

*l'or a description of the switch selection method, seo the 

descnption ril the hack ot this nwnud. 

• Servo speed setting 

Move the cursor lo Ihe aileron. Hap or 

elevator speed item ana touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Adjust fhe ra"e by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

In:)fal value: 0 

Adjustment range: 0-27 (mcxirnum delcy) 

"When the RTN Ivj'.imi is tou,"lied fur mu- second, ilie r.«o i<> 

Touch the RTN bulton to activate ihe 

function and return to fhe cursor mode. 

•Auto switch selection 

When selecting an auto switch, move the 

cursor lo Uie [AUTO-SW) item and touch the 

RTN bulton to access the selection screen. 

Select the switch and set its ON direction. 

(Always ON atsetting) 

"|-'or d inscription tif ihe switch selection method, sec the 

This function is used to increase the aii eraft's 

drag and is useful for landing or diving, etc. 

Th«! preset elevators and flaps (camber flap, 

brake flap) offset amount can be activated by a 

switch. 

The oflset amount of (he aileron, elevator, and 

Hap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the 

speed of the aileron, elevator, and flap servos can 

be adjusted. If the Auto Mode is activated, this 

will link the Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A 

separate slick switch or dial can also be set as lite 

OWOFF switch. 

• Select (AIRBRAKE) at fhe Model menu and acces: 

the setup screen shown below by touching tin: 

RTN button. 

Selling example fur F3.\and other flupt-i on specifications 

(When 2 ailerons model tyoe selected) 

Otijtttrote: 

All: [-35 —I5%j. AIL2: |-3S--»S%j. ELE: |*5-7%) 

Note: The input nuntcrics are examples. Adjust lite t 

match the aircr.ift. 

Mode setting: 

AC!': fO.v] 

Sv.-'ch: (SW-Ol 

AUTO-SW: H 

•rcnaaaasm 

134 --A'-StfJ:?; Mi:*:) (Ai|>5><ii:*4«;fci Mem: (Aifjil.itiV.'CiiiJi-r X-XHeiU-.w 13fj 
Setting nteffioti 

• Activate (he function 

Move the cuisor lo the [ACT) item one; touch 

the RTN button to swilch to the da-:a input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling Die 

touch sensor. 

•Tlie display Winlis 

Touch the #TN button to activate 'he 

Junction end relurn to 'he cursor mode. (ON 

is displayed.) 

When spiling a switch, move the cursor to 

(he switch item and touch the RTN buMori 

lo access Ihe selection screen. Select the 

switch one! set its ON direction. (Always OK 

alselling} 

Sctet 

• Offset rate adjustment 

Move 'he cursor to ihe aileron, flop or 

elevator role ilem and touch the RTN button 

to switch to Ihe data inpul mode. Adjust the 

rale independently by scrolling Ihe touch 

sensor. 

Initio! value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -250- <-'2b0% 

•Wltwi Ihe R'lN Ijimim >s t.ueited hi <r.,e second. ilie r;.:c is 

rosei 10 the initial value.) 

Touch the 3TN bullon fo end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

»Servo speed setting 

Move the cursor to the aileron, llap or 

elevator speed ilem one touch Die RTN 

button to switch to Ihe dcta input mode. 

Adjust Ihe rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initio! value: 0 

Adjustment range: 0-1?7 (maximum delay) 

*WJ|«) i)).- RTN h'.t'.iiwt is unu-hoi Ito one soto:s./, the r.V.o is 

tvseitoUte iiiiii.il v-ilne.) 

Touch the RTN button lo relurn lo the cursor 

•Auto switch detecti<>n 

When setting a ciuto switch, move Ihe cursor 

lo the [AUTO-SW] ilem and touch Hie RTN 

button to access the selection screen. Select 

Ihe switch and set its ON direction. (Alwa/s 

OK atseHing) 

!H.J, * 

dCHCripti. 

EUVA1CR E|_£VAT0R 2 

GVKO 

Tltts function is useci when a CI YA Series gyro 

is used lo stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The 

sensiiivity and operation mode (Norma! mode/ 

AVCS mode) can be changed via a switch. 

• Three rotes |Rolo i/Role 2/Roie 3) c.csn bo 

switched. 

• Up lo 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3] con be 

S:niullonBOJSl/ controlled. 

• Select [GYRO] ot the Model menu and 

access the setup screen shown below 

by touching the RTN button. 

[Rate ! setup screen] 

[Corresponding model lype]: Airplane/glider, general 

Note: This selling does no) assign a sensitivity 

channel. To do so, use the linkage menu 

prior to assigning the sensitivity channel 

(Gyro/Gyfo2/Gyfo3), be sure to select an 

unused channel. 

Set Ihe [ControlJ and [Trim] settings other than 

Function to 

jr 

'• display) 

i <SensorTouch'M> 

S i GVRO AVCS 

GVR02 FlVCS 

GYR03 flVCS 

TVPE GV 

INH 

0X 

0X 

ACT/INH -

• Sw:tcn setecTion -

[Rale 2 setup screen] 

GVRO 

#@GVRO RVCS 0 % 

GVR02 ftVCS 0 X 

GVRO 3 RVCS 0 X 

TVPE GV 

INH — 

• Ihe operation mode (AVCS/NOR) 

and sensitivity of the three axis 

Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3 can be set. 

|Rote 3 setup screen) 

GVRO 

#0GVBO 

GVR02 

GVR03 

TVPE 

flVCS 0X 

flVCS 0 X 

RVCS 0 x 

GV 

INH --

assign the •iviiy c: it (i 

c f.inkago n 

i»2i'Gvro3) « 

Set [Control} ••nift (Trim) other liian function "d [-]. 

• Ratel-3 setup screen selection 

Move ihe cuisor to the selup screen selection 

ilem and touch Ihe RTN button to switch 

to the data input mode. Select ihe setup 

screen # by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Touch Ihe RTN bullon lo chonge Ihe seiup 

screen and return to tne cuisor mode. 

• Activate (tic function 

Move the cursor to the [INH] item and louch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

-••Mink-i Menu ( Airs 

> activate Ihe 

rsor mode. 

ca.;n 137 

When setting o rale selection switch, move 

the cursor to the switch item anci touch the 

RTN button to access the selection screen. 

Selecl tne swilch and sel its ON direction. 

(Always ON atselling) 

e Ok' 

jripuon at tfiv back of this J. 

• Gyro type selection 

Move the cursor to Ihe gyro type selection 

ilem ond touch Ihe RJ'N button to swilch lo 

Ihe dole input mode. Select the gyro type 

by scrolling the touch sensor. 

[GYj: When o Futobo GYA gyro is used 

(NORM]: When us'ir.g something other than 

rulaba GYA gyro is used. 

Touch the R;N bullon to change Ihe gyro 

type ond return to the cuisor mode. 

* tV'hc-.Ti'mabu t i YA fly lo i.v :i soJ J;k IIOY/ !v|v is sel<v;<i), 

ili v" sc: i si I i v- i l y ict v.ilue is directly rc.iJ in bi>sh Ihe AVCS 

ami NORM unities. 

• Operation mode selection (GYA jjyro) 

Move 'he cursor -o the operation mode 

selection item and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode. Select 

the operation mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

lAVCS]: AVCS mode 

[NORM]: Noimal mode 

Touch the RTN bulton lo change Ihe 

operation mode and return to the cursor 

mode. 

•Sensitivity setting 

Move the cursor to the sensitivity icon ond 

touch the RTN button to swiich to tne dalo 

input mode. 

Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the touch 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjus'menl range: 0-100% 

•When the RTN button is touched Tor one sooontl, the 

sensitivity is reset to tin: initial value.) 

Touch the RTN bullon to return |o the cursor 

mode. 

niple) Setting three axis ushtg a CVA-130 and C.YA431 (I) 

. Gyro i )GYAJ30RUD|: CH0 a 

n.] INOK.V.J idr/:)(No»M] |<*ra.] 

;:;!Avcsi(6cr/;|:Avcsi[frj^; 

u ba<k pus.Lai ol\sv.,lol> I: ml Rate 1 is tui:*-,i ON ,-.t ll.' iron 

H-»'»iiliccci.lcr.»jte2rciiidiii«l1NHl. AW, C . 

I'AU. [Corresponding model type): Aiiplone/gtider, V-lcil 

This function enables adjustments for left and 

right rudder angle changes during elevator and 

rudder operation of a V-tail airplane. 

V-lail is when two servos are used together to 

control rudder movement as elevators. In addition 

to each elevator side moving up and down together, 

each side moves in opposite directions when moving 

as rudders. On a V-tail, this is also known as a 

Ruddetvatoi; as they serve the same putpose. 

• Selecl [V-TAlL] ot the Model menu and 

occess the setup screen shown below 

by touching the RTN button. 

ELEVATOR 

ELE <RUD2> 

RUD <ELE2> 

RUDDER 

ELE <RUD£> 

RUO <ELE£> 

(Elevator function) 

Up and down travel adjustment ot 

eievator operation 

(KuJaci lunction) 

cdjustrni 

operation 

Setting method 

» Travel adjustment 

Move the cursor to the item you want t< 

adjust and touch rhe RTN button ta switch h 

the data input mode. 

Adjust the roto by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: +50% 

Adjustment ronge: -120~+120% 

'When the RTN button is IOUCIK-,1 fur <I:IC settnul, the rj'.e i 

Touch the RTN button to letum to the ciuisc 

mode. 

"Il'tiie uiixitij! Jireciitiii is icveivrd, ailjustni'.'n'.s e<m iv siwJ 

by cha:ii;iiiL- the mixing rate poUrity or -). 

'If a larjjc vjltie nf travel is spocifieil. when the sticks JI 

IV biiiil 01 

I IX-cr, .<• tlie i I no bindine, o< 

'•Modvl M'.'IMT! Virji'.itiMitlCSiOJ.s;.-- 13g 
Ali,i-:VATOR [Corresponding mc 

(Mcciivtf.mty wli. 

iel type): Airplane/glider. Ailevator WINGIJ'.Vl' [Corresponding model lype]'. Airplane/glider. Flying wing only 

Tiiis function improves the performance of the roll 

axis hv operating the elevators ;is ailerons. 

Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard 

(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, like 

ailerons on a wing, in addition to each elevator side 

moving up and down together, each side moves in 

opposite directions when moving as an Ailevator. On 

a V-laii, tiiis is also known as a Ruddeivator, as they 

can sene the same purpose. Typically, both Ailevator 

and ailerons are coupled together to maximize roll 

performance, especially on larger wingspnn planes. 

Nolo: Sd::c1 Ailevalor as thr; Model type al the Model 

type screen. Inis changes the output choanot. Chock 

• Select [AILEVATOR] ol the Model menu 

and access the setup screen s' 

below by touching the RTN button. 

/ 

ELEVATOR 

{AILERON 5) ELEVATOR 2 

(AILERON 6) 

iSv 

iiim'jin'ja 

ELEVATOR + * 

ELE <FiILS> +100 X +100 X 

ELE2<AIL6> +100 X+100 X 

AILERON 

ELE <RIL5> 

E(_£2<fl IL6> 

y <SensorTouch,M> 

(Elevator function; 

• The up and down rate of both 

elevators "when the elevator stick 

is moved con be individually 

adjusted. 

Setting method 

• Travel adjustment 

Move the cuisor to the item you wont to 

adjust and touch the RTN burton to switch to 

the data input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initio! value: Sl.E: +100%, AIL: 0% 

Adjustment ranker-12CJ- + '• 20% 

•When itui It'IN imt'em i* UweSteil Tor one second. tin: r.ile is 

(Aileron tunction) 

* When the elevators are used 

as ailerons, aileron travel of 

the left and right elevators 

con be odjusled. 

toy ch.uijiiiig Uit mixing rsle polarity or -} 

•If a lin^e v.iluc of tr.tvel is specifa-ii. when the slicks arc 

moved LII 'Jie same litre, the controls may bind or run our of 

(ravel. DocriMse the travel umil m> himling incurs. 

This function adjusts the left and right rodder 

angles of airplanes with winglets. 

Winglets are used to improve ilie efficiency of 

uircrall by lowering the lill-itiduced drag caused by 

wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled 

extension located at the tip of each wing. 

Winglets woifc by increasing the effective aspect 

ratio wing without adding greatly to the structural 

stress and hence necessary weight of its structure 

- an extension of wing span would also permit 

lowering of induced drag, though it would cause 

parasitic drag and would require boosting the 

strength of the wing and hence its weight. There 

would come a point at which no overall useful 

gains would be made. A wingiel helps to solve this 

by effectively increasing the aspect ratio without 

adding to the span of the wing. 

» Select (W1NGLET) at the Model menu 

ond access the setup screen shown 

below by touching (he RTN button. 

RUDDER « 

RUDDER +100 X +100 X 

RUDDERS +100 X+100 X 

<SensorTouch,M> 

»Travel adjustment 

Move the cursor lo the item you wan! lo 

adjust ond touch the RTN button to switch to 

the data input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initio! vclue: <100% 

Adjustment range: -120-+120% 

•When lire RTN tuition is louclicd lor OIK ictomi. the mo is 

erl/2) 

e travel clurng rudder stick operation 

'iri be individually adjusted. 

Touch t 

mode. 

le RTN button lo return to the cursor 

MOTOR [Corresponding model type): Airplane/glider, general 

This function lets you set the speed when the 

malar of an F5(i or oiher J:P glider is stalled vw 

a switch. The operation speed can be set for two 

ranges, slow speed flight and high speed flight 

(Speed !/Speed 2). This function can also be 

operated as a safely function by programming it to 

a switch. 

• The In side and Out s

;d«; operating speeds can 

be adjusted independently in 2 raffles (Speed 1/ 

Speed 2J. 

« The boundary behvenn the 7 ranges can be set. 

{From Speed 1 to .Speed V| 

• The ope'otiona! speed can only be activated at 

the ini!:at operation. However, opeiation can bs 

repealed by setting the switch to OFF before thu 

operaiion is finished. When you want tn reset crio 

« Select [MOTOR] at the Model menu 

and occess the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button. 

time ope-'otion, set the ACT/INH Mem to [INHj ond 

then leiet it lo (ONJ. 

• Th<i motor channel is controlled by SW-G. (Glider: 

Initial setting) When changing the switch or stick 

which controls Ins motor, first chonge function ol 

the Linkage menu. 

• 11 Ihe Model Type selected is Aiiplone. the MOTOR 

tunction is changed from 1NH to ON and it is not 

ass;gnod to another channel the changes from 

the throttle channel to the motor channel ore 

enabled. 

Note: initial selling does not assign a motor 

channel according to Ihe model lype. Prior to 

assigning Ihe motor channel, find an unused 

channel. Then, use fhe Function menu of the 

Linkage menu. 

Set (Control) to the switch you want to use 

and prim] to J--). 

Note: When using this function, always check 

the initial operation with the propeller 

removed. 

• Activate (lie function 

When using Ihis function. move Ihe cursor lo 

Ihe [ACT/INH) item arid iouch the RTN button 

to switch lo the da^a input mode. Select 'he 

(ACT[ oy scrolling the touch sensor and touch 

the RTN bultori. 

When selecting Ihe ON/OF? swilch. move Ihe 

cursor lo Ihe switch Hem and iouch Ihe PIN 

button lo occess Ihe selection screen. Select 

the switch and set its ON direction. (Always 

ON atsetting) 

The screen graph display OFF direction also 

changes. 

Note: . 

• First decide the motor OFF direction, and then 

set the speed. When you want lo reset the 

motor OFF direction, also reset the speed. 

• We recommend that Motor OFF be set in 

combination with F/S. 

• Set the basic operation direction with fhe 

Reverse function to match the ESC used. 

• Always set the Motor OFF position. 

iicilunl, 

leli.ieknl'this 

• Motor off position setting 

Move the cursor to the [MOTOR OF?) item 

and touch the RTN button for one second 

when the motor function switch (SG, etc.) is 

in the motor Off position you wen! to sel. The 

direction oi the motor switch is memorized. 

IEsSEST 

SP-EED IHH 

ONE TIME INK 

_ _ IN OUT SPEED N FA I l->2 ill 0 0 1 

+0 2| 0 0 

• Activate the motor speed function 

When using motor speed function, move the 

cursor to the [INH] item and touch Ihe RTN 

button to switch to the dcta input mode. 

Select the [AO] by scrolling the touch sensor 

and iouch the RTN button. 

• Sifting liie boundary between Ilie 2 ranges 

Move Ihe cursor to the [Sf'EED 1>2] Mem and 

touch the RTN button to swilch to the data 

input mode. 

Adjust the boundary position by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment ronge: -!00-+!00% 

'When lilt ItTN billion is louched fr.r one second, the r.V.e is 

reset to lite initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button lo return to the cursor 

/node. 

• Operation speed adjustment 

Move the cursor to tin; [IN) (on to off) or (OUT) 

(off lo on) item and 'ouch the RTN button to 

switch to the colo input mode. 

Adjust the operation speed you wanl to set 

by scroihnc the touch sensor. 

Initial value: 0 

Adjustment ronge: 0-27 

•When ilie RTN buuon is louched fur one sivoml. ilie rate is 

resol :o liie imiiiil wine.) 

Touch the RTN button lo return to the cursor 

mode. 

• Set/Reset the one time operation 

Move Ihe cursor to the (ONE TIME) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the dato 

input mode. 

Select the (ACT) by scrolling the touch sensor 

and touch the RTN button to set Ihe one time 

operaiion. 

IXfl new uijlNJl) ami du-n icscl it m |ONj. 

isifi?«fa U7 

RCT OFF flow 

SW SG 

START SW J2 u 

MOTOR OFF +80 •-1 

TRIM OFF CURUE •OFF 

• ON/OFF direction 

» Motor function switch 

current position 

• Start switch function 

When active, the "START SW" allows the 

motor's state to change from OFF to ON. The 

molor is ON when the main SW and "START 

SW" are lurned ON simullcneously. The motor 

changes lo OFF only when the main SW is 

turned off. If "START SW is turned OFF but the 

main SW is sMI ON, (he motor remains ON. 

[START SW function example! 

Wnen ihe Vnroilte (n-olor) siici. is assigned as U-e 'START SW'. 

motor siarts opfiralhg with |!-.e ir.rtial stick movc-Te^t. me molor 

• Trim effect / invalid setting in motor OFF 

If one of the trim levers is assigned to Ihe 

Motor function, it is possible to turn the 

motor off with the ifim lever. To maintain 

compatibility after updating the TMSG/S. 

the trim setting is adjusted to the on position. 

However, i) is suggested to return it to the off 

posifon accordingly in the programming ol 

Ihe transmitter. 

Reset will return the Irira u< ihe olTpo»iti.>». 

• Screen at the time of (lie motor OFF setting 

When the MOTOR OFF soiling is highlighted, 

you will note the presence of Ihe smell cursor 

(hot indicotes Ihe MOTOR OFF position. To 

adjust this MOTOR OFF position, use the 

Ihrottie stick to move the cursor accordingly. 

When satisfied with this position, press ond 

hold the RTN button on the ttansmitter. 

•The !.tr^er 

SET: 5ush RTNUsec) 

RCT OFF HON 

SW SG 

START sw J2 J 

MOTOR OFF >> 1 

TRIM OFF CURVE •OFF 

•Tbrotllc curve buitoii 

When CURVE button is chosen, a thi of tie 

curve screen opens. 

•When a ihrotlle finmiim is asMittieJ lo either chamiel. the 

"CUMV hutuia is mil .tisjilayeil beca.ise a ihroitle curve 

142 ' lid:.'! MVirjil.H 143 
HUD to Fi.Si [Coiresoondmg mode! type]: Airplane, general SNAP ROM. [Coiresponding model lypej: Airplane, general 

This function is used when yoa want lo mix 

elevator operation with rudder operation, it is used 

to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder is 

applied in roiling maneuvers such as. knife edue 

flight. " 

• Mixing during 'licjht car: be turned ON/OFF by 

selling a switch. (Always ON at [-) setting) 

»l:nk fiiying can be set; Lirv<s this rrvx to other nVxes. 

. Select [RUD to ELE] at Ihe Model 

menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

buifon. 

r 

rr.cnu bv ii 

RtN butlc 

HOME/EX! 

SEESO RCT INH — 

> +0<+100>LINK INH 

> +0 +0 

> +0C-100) , 

<SensorTouchTM> 

Setting; method 

• Activate the function 

Move the cursor to Ihe JACT) item one touch 

the RTN button to switch tc the date input 

mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the 

touch serisoi. 

*Tlicitis|)Uy blinks 

Touch Ihe RTN button to activate (he 

function and return to the cursor mode. (ON 

is deployed.) 

When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 

the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to 

caii the selection saeen. Select the switch 

ar.d set its ON direction. (Always ON at 

setting) . . • , .. 

• S-point curve setting (airplane) 

ICt-fve role setting) 

1. Move Ihe cursor to Ihe curve role setting 

item (leff side) you wont to adjust and touch 

the RTN button to switch tc the date input 

mode. 

Adjust the rote by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Adjustment range: -100%-+100% 

•Wlici the RTN t'uuon is U'jciicd lor o:ic secon<1. Die hm is 

r«o: to (he iiiiii.it v.itue.l 

Touch Ihe RTN button to end Ihe odjustmer.t 

and return to the cursor mode. 

?. Renecu ims procedure tor each point, 

[Moving cuive point] 

t. Move ino cursor to the curve point setting 

item you want to adjust and touch ihe RTN 

button tc switch, to the data input mode. 

Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Adjustment ranges: Up to 2.5% in front of the 

adjoining point 

"When thi- RTN liiiUnii is tuuehod fin mc wamJ. ihscurvi' 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return io the cutset mode. 

2. Repeat (his procedure for each point. 

[Deleting/returning curve po'nt] 

Move ihe cursor to the cuive point setting 

item you want lo delete/return crd touch 

Ihe RTN button tor one second. 

•Link mode setting 

When selecting the link mixing, move the 

cursor to the (LINK) item and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

•The display blinks. 

Touch the RTN button tc set the link mode 

arid return to the cursor mode. 

This function selects the switch nntl rate 

adjustment of ailerons, elevators, and rudder when 

it snap roil is performed. 

• Four snap roll directions con be set. (Riyht/up. 

right/down, laC./uo. left/down) 

• Operation mode: When (Muster) mode is selected, 

the Snap Roil function Is turned ON/OFF by Hie 

masler switch. !t is possible tc sot the direction 

switch was switched to in* direct:cn in which you 

wont lo sr-.op roll. When (S^gle] 'nocJt; is selected, 

the snap roll in each direction c.on bo executed 

by rr-cons ol independent switches and positions. 

• A scfstv switch con bo set to prevent the 

inacveilent activation of the snap roll. For 

example;, the lor.u'iny gear is lowered, even il 

the swiich is turned on occidental:'/ thn snap toil 

would not be executed. Ihe snap roll switch is 

activated only when the safety swiich ii OFF. 

(Example) Setting example for l'3A 

» Mode: [Master] 

• SofeiySW: (SGI [Safety meosure) 

» Master SW: iSHj (Main switch fot executing 

snap roll) 

t Direction switches: 

•TV- mil lip si.lo loll aiv.l right jnd J<mi side Itf; xul rit^h; 

iliitcliivi iwitc-hes a/c sdtx'lrtilien:. 

Ri;;ht/Up: OIT (SO] 

PiGM/Oowr: ()fh (SO] 

Iftft/Jp- OFF (SA; 

Lett/Down. Off (SAj 

• Select [SNAP ROI L] at Ihe Model menu 

and occess the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button. 

ag[S«3«M 1/3 

RIL ELE RUD 

+ 100 + 100 + 100 

*/4> + 100 -100 -100 

<r/-1- -100 + 100 -100 

*/4- -100 -100 + 100 

<SensorTouch 

2/3 

MODE MRSTERMfiSTER-SW — 

SFLFETV-SW — 

RCT SW 

*/'T OFF — 

OFF — 

j*/+ OFF — 

*-/+ _ OFF _ — 

"3/3 

• Direction switches 

Setting method 

• Master/single mode selectKin 

Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and 

touch the RTN button to switch io the data 

input mode. Select the master or single 

mode by scrolrng the touch sensor. 

•Tin; Ji-f Uy blinks. 

[//ASTER]: Master mode 

[SINGLE]: Single mode 

Touch Ihe RTN button to select the mode 

and return to the cursor mode. 

When setting o moslef switch, move the 

cursor to Ihe [MASTER-SWJ item and touch 

the RTN button to access the selection 

screen. Select the switch end set its ON 

direction. 

ili'scnpUun jl '.he back of (Ms manual. 

When setting o sofety switch, move the 

cursor to the (SAFfrTY-SW) item and touch the 

RTN button to access Ihe selection sceen. 

Select the switch and set its ON direction. 

• Direction switch scicetimi 

Move the cursor to ihe direction switch ilem 

and touch the RTN butlon to occess the 

selection screen. Select the switch and set its 

ON direction. 

mi, <i 

il'tliis i 

• kale adjustment 

Move Ihe cursor lo the- aileron, elevator or 

rudder Hern for each d

:

rection and touch the 

f?/N ballon to switch lo Ihe dole input mode. 

Adjust Hie rate independently by sa oiling 

tne touch sensor. 

Initicl vclue: (Dependei 

direction) 

Adjustment range: -1 S0~ 

• upon the snap roll 

1

; 50% 

k 

tW t 

MODKI.MKMJ (HELKIOPTi-.R) 

This section contains information on (he 

commands (fiat apply (o helicopters only. For 

instructions on Airplanes and Sailplanes, refer lo 

the sections pertaining to those aircraft. 

Use Ihe Mode! Type function in (he Linkage 

Menu to select the swash type matched to the 

respective aircraft. 

Also, activate/deactivate flight conditions 

according io your model. To do so, access at the 

Condition Select screen prior to adjusting (he 

model's pmawctcrs. /Up to Jive conditions can be 

used) 

The Dual Rate function and other functions 

common to all model types have already been 

described elsewhere in this manual. Please refer to 

these respective sections for information on /row to 

do so. 

i Access the Model menu shown below by 

touching Ihe RTN button twice al the home 

screen, etc. 

MODEL MENU 

SERVO 

CONDITION 

DUAL RATE 

PROG. MIX 

PIT CURVE 

1/2 

THR CURVE 

THR HOLD 

SWRSH MIX 

THR MIX 

PIT->RUD 

<SensorTouch,u> 

•MODEL MENUBI 2/2 

FUEL MIX : 

GVR0 ; 

GOVERNOR : 

> Select the function you 

wont to set and access 

the setup screen by 

touching Ihe RTN button. 

Model Menu functions (helicopter) list 

PIT CURVE: Adjusts pitch settings in dilVcrent (light conditions 

THR CURVE: Throttle cuivc and hovering trim adjustment in diffeicnl flight conditio! 

THR HOLD: Moves the throttle to idle during autorolaiinn 

SWASH MIX: Compensates control response in diifeienl flight conditions 

THROTTLE MIX: Compensates lor power loss when cyclic applied 

PIT lo NEEDLE: Adjusts pitch response in different flight conditions 

PIT to RUD: Compensates torque changes Irom pilch angle inputs 

GYRO: Used lo switch gyro sensitivity 

GOVERNOR: Used lo swiich RPM oi'ihe helicopter's head 

14g 
PIT CURVE/PIT TRIM 

Pitch Curve 

This function adjusts I he pitch operation curve 

for each flight condition to opunize ihe model's 

performance in relationship lo the throttle stick position. 

. Seltic.) |fl' Cl f-'VC) Ql th« Model mono one 

Ih? jeluo scoon shown below ny toucJ 

RTH bulir.n. 

r 

11 

• ieisel Ilia (or 

NORMAL ~ 1/3 ! 

EDITNORMAL COPV 

<SensofTouchTU> 

• 5-polnt curve setting 

(Curve rate sePingj 

I. Move the cursor lo the curve rate selling 

item you want lo adjust and Icuch Ihe RTN 

button to sv/ilch lo Ihe cola input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initial value: PI: -100%. P2: -S0%. P3: 0%. P4: 

<60%. PS: ' 103% 

Adjustment range: -100%-+100% 

2. Repeal tills procedure for each point as 

desired. 

(Moving r.t.ive point) 

1. Move the cursor lo the curve point setting 

item you want to cdjusl and touch ihe RIM 

bu'tcn to switch to Ihe daia input mode. 

Adjust the curve point by scrolling the louch 

sensor. 

Initial value: PI: I07i|. P2: 2S%. P3: Sr.)%, P4: 

75%. P.5: (100%) 

Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the 

adjoining pcini 

copy 

Move the cursor to the curve point setting 

item you want to delete/return end touch 

Ihe RTN button for one second, 

•Pitch curve copy function 

Move Ihe cursor lo COPY and touch the RTN 

butlon lo switch to ihe data input mode. 

Select the copy destination condition by 

scrolling the touch sensor and touch the R1N 

butlon. Select the (VESj ana touch the RTN 

button. 

Normal curve adjustment 

IcHe up curve ftrfjusYmcnt 

:or tin.' side pitch curve 

Throtlle hold curve adjustment 

I'tie throttle hold curvy is used who 

•Whci n- RTN h . ;hs ei 

in Ihe i 

Operation precautions 

A Warning 

o 

(Deleting/reluming c 

I When actually starting the engine 

always set the idle up condition aw 

arid start the engine ,-it idte. 

and Hying, 

itch to Oi;F 

i:-. ;;i M:Kk-l \!V 

Curve sening examples 

The screens shown below arc curves created by 

entering the pitch rate <il low, center, and high side {3 

points or 5 points) at each condition. 

When actually creatine a curve, input the rate 

specified by die model (or the reference value). 

• Pitch Curve (Example) 

Normal Curvn idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve Hold Curve 

Pitch Trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch) 

(Hovering pilch trim selling] 

AMASSA: NOFTMFLL 2/5 

HOMER EDIT NORMAL 

RCT ON LD 

MODE CTRM 

RRTE +30* < +0'/.) 

RfiNrtE 100* 

Hovering pitch trim 

The Hovering PilcJ) trim junction trims the pitch 

near the hovering point. Normally, it is used with 

the hovciing condition. The hovering pitch can be 

line tuned for changes in rotor speed accompanying 

changes in temperature, humidity, and oilier IJigtot 

conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so that 

rotor sp^ed is constant. This function can be used 

together with the Hovering Throttle Trim function 

for more precise operation. 

Setting method 

• Set the function to ACT [ON]. (initial selling) 

• Select the adjustment knob. 

Selection example: ID (initial setting) 

• The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/ 

NORM) con be selected. 

CTRM mode: Moximum amount of change 

near center by center trim operation 

(recommended) 

NORM mode: Normal trim (parallel 

movement trim] operation. The advantage 

of using this mode is thai 'he hovering pitch 

can be adjusted without changing tne 

curve. 

• Ihe trim rate can be adjusted and the 

operation direction can be changed. 

• Trim adjustment range (Range) selling 

When tivs value is made small, him can only 

be used near the center. 

set \h-u\i 

(few/High pilch trim selling] 

NORMAL 3/5 

EDIT N0RMRL 

LOW PITCH IHIGH PITCH 

act INH —ifiCT INH — 

RATE +30* [RATE +30* 

< +0*> : < +0*) 

High Pitclt/Lo>v Filch Trin 

High Piich/Low Pilch Trim is the pitch s 

high side and low side trim fund ion. 

Setting method 

» Set ihe function to ACT (ON). 

• Select the adjustment knobs. 

Selection example: LS (high side). RS (low 

side} 

• The trim role con be adjusted ond the 

operaiion direclion con be changed. 

• Trim acls as high side or low side trim with Ihe 

center as Ihe standcrd. 

IllR o;im^TitROTTU'. HOVER TUI.Y? 

TJiroMc Curve 

Throttle curve function adjusts the throttle 

operation curve, for each condition to optimize the 

engine speed to throttle stick movement. 

The Throttle Hover function trims (he throttle 

near the hovering point. Normally, use it with 

hovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed 

• Select (THR CURVE) o! Ihe Model menu ond I 

access the setup screen shown below by I 

touctwig the R1N button. I 

accompanying changes in Ihe temperature, 

humidity, and other flight conditions can be 

trimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation is 

muse stable. Mare piecisc (rimming is also possible 

by using this function along with Ihe Hover Pilch 

function. 

emtyscl 

NORMAL 

ED IT NORMAL COPV 

> £100.0 <100 > 

>4 75.0 75.0 

>3 50.0 50. " 

>2 25.0 2 5 .1 

• l 0.0 < 0 ) 

• ^ 

• curve point Tnroitlo curve copy 

Setting method 

• 5-point curve selling 

fCuive rate sefiinaj 

1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting 

item you want lo adjusl and touch the RTN 

butlon to sv/ilch lo the data inpyl mode. 

Adjust (he rate by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

Initial value: PI: 0%. P2: 25%. P3: b0%, PA: 7$%. 

PS: 100% 

Adjustment range: 0%~ iC0% 

•Winn die RTN bull'..;) is touched ioi one second, llie mc is 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

ond return to Ihe cursor mode. 

2. Repeat this procedure foi each point as 

desired. 

[Moving curve point] 

1. Wove the cursor lo the curve point setting 

item you want to adjust and touch the R1N 

butlon to switch la the data inpul mode. 

Adjust the curve poinl by scrolling ihe louch 

sensor. 

Iniliol value: PI: !(>%). P2: 2b%. P3: 50%. P<i: 

76%. PS: (100%) 

Adjustment icnge: UP to 2.5% in ironl ot the 

adjoining pain: 

"When lite RTN buium is touched fw cmc second, the curve 

Touch Ihe R1N button to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursoi mode. 

2. Repeol this procedure tor each poinl as desired. 

(Deleting/returning curve point] 

1 Move Ihe cursor to the curve point setting 

item you want to delete/return and touch 

ihe RTN button lor one second. 

• Throttle curve copy function 

Move ihe COPY item and touch Ihe RTN 

button to switch to the da-a input mode. 

Select the copy destination condition by 

seeing ?he touch tensor and 'ouch the RTN 

bullon. Select the [YES] and touch ihe RTN 

bultcn. 

Normal curve adjustment 

•Normal eurve ciejtcs 2 basic curve c entered »rou»d 

hovering. Use it aluiig with the nornul riitch curve uiut 

r,(iju« so lh.il tip-down co:i;rol refills in cdiKLiiit engine 

speed 

Idle up curve adjustment 

•Sc! a i.ltc ;IJI ANC ;ha; .1 COST Ci.'il S|ic'i:i1 ;i! till 

times, even during ip|H'r.uioii wtiioh rc duces (ho pitch 

performed in flight. Create o curve nialt ed U) l,„p. inll. 

3D, or otticr purpi^'s and •;,o idle up ci 

Operation precautions 

A\ Warning 

©When actually starling ihe engine and flying, 

always set 'lie idle up condition switch lo OJ'i' 

and stait the engine at the idle. 

s of \ :lk'!ieopit:f l-'ti 151 
Curve setting examples 

The curves shown below arc crealcd by inputting 

ihe data of the 5 points 0% (low side), 25%, 

50% (center), 75%. 100% Oiiyh) side for each 

condiiion. When actually creating a curve, enter the 

parameter*; specified per (be model (or the reference 

•Throttle Curve (Example) 

Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve 

Throttle Mover trim 

[Ihrottle hover trim setlincj) 

li:iriiiiia^'''l^QRM'i=iL 2/3 

HOVER EDITNORMRL 

RCT ON RD 

MODE CTRM 

RRTE +30*. < 

RRNGE 1004 

Setting method 

» Sei the function io ACT ((ON(). (fnifiol sefling! 

» Select the adjustment knob. 

Selection example: RD (initio! setting) 

» The trinn operation mode (Mode: CTRM/ 

NORM) can be selected. 

CTRM mode: Maximum rate of change 

near cenlei by center trim operalion 

(recommended) 

NORM mode: Normal trim (horizontal 

movement trim) operation. 

» The trim rote can be adjusted and the 

operation direction can be sel. 

» Trim adjustment range (Range) setting 

With smaller values, the trim is only active 

near Ihe center. 

Throttle limitcr function 

This function limits the high range of" the throttle 

movement by any slider or trimmer. 

[Throttle limitei setting] 

niiapmaip NORMRL 3/3 

THR LIMITER NORMRL 

RCT SW CTRL 

ON — RS 

HIGH LOU CENTER 

80 15 55 

'Set al llv.' 3rd p.igc of ihu throttle curve screen. 

•Activate the function. 

1. Select ACT ond touch the RTN button. 

2. Switch Hie display to ACT by scrolling the 

touch sensor. 

'The display blinks. 

INH: tnlrbil 

ACT: Activate 

3. Enter the selection by touching Ihe RTN 

button. 

•ON/OFF switch setting 

1. Select SW ond touch Ihe RTN button. 

2. The HAV SET screen is displayed. Select |h<> 

hardware and touch ihe RTfl button. 

•Higlt snle operating range setting 

1. S'eleCT KKiH and touch tne RTN oufton. 

2. Adjust the high side operating range by 

sctolllng the touch sensor. 

3. Touch the RTN button to switch to the cuisor 

mode. 

•Low side operating range setting 

1. Select LOW end touch the R"N button. 

2. Adjust tne low side operating range by 

scroD'fig Ihe •ouch senior. 

•A is displayed tit the lufi side nf the y.r.iph. 

3. Touch Ihe RTN butlon to switch to the cuisor 

mode. 

•Llmiter operating range adjustment eontriil 

setting 

I. Select CTRL and touch the RTN button, 

The H/VV SET screen is displayed. Select the 

hordwnre and touch the RTN button. 

•Changing the control center pusition 

1. Select CENTER and touch the RTN button tor 

1 second. CENTER changes Irom INH to "rate 

display". 

2. When the CENTER rale is changed, the 

neutral position of the hardware se: at CTRL 

can be adjusted. 

•When CT.N'VKR is INH, the nciilul position becomes die 

LOW intermediate v.iliie. 

•When C!;NTUR is tlungvd fumi INM lo "mtc di.-ptey". die 

CFNTtiK ra:o IS sol lo -he LOW intLW.ediate VJUIC 

»T|ic CTNTHU rate iMti Iv; sel between ft (OK and 

of Mrttlcl YU-uu ili^k-tpu-.r 

1'IIR HOLD 

This function sets the throttle cut position for 

auto rotation. The throttle servo operating speed 

MJJ be adjusted. (Sp-'cd) 

Note: initially, this setting does not assign ihe 

throttle hold switch. Prior to adjusting the 

parameters for the throttle hold, we suggest 

designating a fhrofffe hold switch. To do so, 

access the Condition menu within ihe Model 

menu options. 

• Select [THR HOLD) at the Model menu 

and access the setup screen shown 

below Oy touching Ihe RTN button. 

U:\mznmv 

ACT OFF 

HOLD POS. 17 X 

SPEED 0 \ 

• Seivo speed 

•Hcic; position setting 

<SensorToucliTM> 

• Hold position 

• Current posilion 

Setting method 

• Hold condition switch selection 

Use the Condition selecl menu of Ihe Model 

menu to assign ihe hold condiiion switch. 

Selection example: SG 

• Maid position adjustment 

Move the cursor to the hotd position item 

ond touch the RIN button to switch lo Ihe 

doia input mode. 

Ad;ust the rote by scrolling -he touch sensor. 

Initial value: 17% 

Adjustment rcnge: 0%-50% 

•Hnkt position sen liic ihuiute cut posiiii'n. Adjust i: so (t.jl 

vty iU-sc 

Touch Ihe RTN button to end the adjustment 

one return to the cursor rncde. 

speed item and 

tch to the data 

• Servo speed setting 

Move the cursci to the set 

touch the RTN button to 

input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch senscr. 

initial value: 0 

Adjustment range: 0-27 [maximum delay) 

•Wlilid ;\ic RTN buuiui i< umdu'ii lor one second. On.- r.uc is 

reset to-.he initial value.) 

Touch the RTN butlon to return lo the cursor 

mode. 

Operation precautions 

A, Warning 

Qwhcn actually stalling the engine ami Hying, 

always sel the idle up condiiion switch to OH' 

and start the engine at idle. 

SWASH MIX 

The swash mix function is used to correct the 

swash plate in (he aileron (roll) direction and 

elevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each 

operalion of each condiiion. 

This function allows the independent rale 

adjustments for the ailerons, elevator and pitch. 

• Selecl (SWASH MIX] at the Model menu 

ond access Ihe setup screen shown 

below by touclvng Ihe RTN button. 

Example of use 

As an example, use swash mixing lo coirect 

undesirable roli tendencies. 

• for a condition which uses AIL to IvLE, set Ihis 

function to ON. 

If the front of ihe helicopter rcises during o 

right roli, when the Rate 2 side is input end 

the right oileron is operated, the elevator 

moves to the down side. Tune by adjusting 

the Rate. 

For let! roll, odjust to 'he Role I s!de. 

£ 

NORMRL 1/2 

EDIT 

NORMRL RRTE1 RRTE2 

f RIL+ELE +0 X +0 X 

' ELE4RIL +0X +0X 

PIT^AIL +0X +0X 

PIT^ELE +0X +0 X 

•Condition selectioi 

a 2/2 

RCT SW TRIM 

RIL^ELE INH — OFF 

ELE^RIL INH — OFF 

PIT+RIL INH — 

PIT-J-ELE INH — 

• Activate Ihe mixing 

When using tnis /unction, move the cursor to 

ihe [ACT) item and touch ihe WIN button lo 

swilch to the data Irtpui mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

•Tlii: display Winks. 

Touch the RTN button to ac'ivote the mix-ng 

and return lo 'he cursor mode. (ON is 

displayed.) 

[Switch selection) 

When { {-;} is set, the swash mixing function 

is oiwoys active and operated by merely 

selecting the condition. 

When selling an [ON)/[OFF; switch, move the 

cursor to Ihe (SW) item ond louch Ihe RTN 

butlon to access the selection screen. Set 

ihe switch and its ON position. 

• Mixing rate adjustment 

Move tin; cursor to the mixing rate item you 

want to carreel and touch the RTN button 

ic switch to the dola input mode. Adjusl the 

role independently by scrolling Ihe icuch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -100--+100% 

•wh. 

to the i I vjtue. 

Touch tne RTN bullon to end the adjusirnent 

and return to ihe cursor mode. 

•Trim mode ON/OFF selling 

When changing the trim mode, move tne 

cursor to the [TRIM) item and touch the RTN 

bulton to switch lo the data input mode. 

Select ON/OFF by scrolling the touch sensor. 

•The display Winks. 

Touch the RTN butlon (o change the irirn 

mode ON/Orf and return to the cursor 

mode. 

wln-ii immg'.liKS inn include T.^'.ot trial! select [OfT], 
ilROTTIJ IX 

This function corrects slowing of engine speed 

caused by swash plate operation during aileron 

or elevator operation. The method of applying 

clockwise or counterclockwise torque when 

pirouetting can also be corrected. 

• Soled [WROTUf- MIX] Cit the Model menu and 

access Ihr selup senior- shown below by touc.ning F 

(he kIN oiiltoi 

Setting example 

All to TIIR mixing counteracts the lag in 

engine RPM's when an aileron input Is given 

to the helicopter. Engine over-speeding 

con be odjusl&d independently /or the 

jiQht ciiieion and le't oilcon inputs utilizing 

Rotes '• ond 2. 

NORMRL 1/2 

e v.otJe'l EDIT 

NORMRL RRTEi RRTE2 

eno'.hM / RIL-^THR +0 X +0% 

f ELE->THR +0 y. +0 X 

** 

RUD-^THR +0 X +0 % 

•Condition selection 

iiimm 2/2 

RCT SW MODE 

RIL^THR INH — CTRM 

ELE*THR INH — CTRM 

RUD*THR INH — CTRM 

line) 

<SenjotToochTM> 

• Activate (he mixing 

When using this -unction, move Ihe cursor to 

the (ACT) item ond touch the WIN button to 

switch to Ihe dcita inpul mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

'The i) 

Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing 

ond return tc Ihe cursor mode. (ON is 

displayed.) 

(Switch selection) 

When | [-)] is set, Ihe swosh mixing function 

is alweys active end operated by merely 

selecting the condition. 

When selling an (ON]/[OFFj switch, move Ihe 

cursor rc the [SW] item and 'ouch Ihe RTN 

button to call Ihe selection scretn. Set the 

sv/tch and its ON position. 

• Mixing rate adjustment 

Move the cursor to the mixing rote item you 

want to coiiect and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the dale inpul mode. Adjust the 

15{> 

Kite independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: - ICO-* 100% 

•WhL-n tilt RTN buiwii i& toudwo lor one >cc,imi. the uk- is 

reset in tlu- initial value.) 

Touch the RTN button to end the odiustment 

and return io (he cuiscr mode. 

•Operation mode setting 

Move the cursor lo ihe [MODE) item and 

touch the RTN button lo switch lo the dala 

input mode. 

Select the operation mode oy scrolling the 

touch sensoi 

"Trt-.: display blinks. 

CTRM mode: Corrects new the center only. 

UN. mode: Corrects ihe complete range. 

Touch the RTN button to change the 

operotion mode and return to Ihe cursor 

mode. 

:f \S.;< 

PIT ta RUD mixing (Rwvhitkm 

Use this mix when you want to suppress the Note: When a GY Series or other heading hold 

reaction limine ecneralei] bv main rnmr pitch ami SYt° Is used, sines correction Is performed by 

speed changes .hiring pilch operation. Adjust so !

he ^ 'hls TMlx ls not U""»J-11 'hls ("ncllon 

' . °, . , ,, • is used when the gyro operation mode ls the 

(hat (he nose does not move m (iie rudder direction. AVCS mode, the neutral position will change. 

• Select (PIT lo RUD} at ihe Model menu arid access 

the setup screen shown beiow by touching Ihe 

RTN button. 

• Activate (he mixing 

When using this function, move ihe cursor to 

ihe [AClj item and touch the RTN bution lo 

switch to the onto input mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the (ouch 

sensor. 

* I'lic display btiuVs. 

Touch the RTN button to oc-ivate the rnix:ng 

and return to the cursoi mode. (ON is 

displayed.) 

•5-point curve sctHii^ 

Move Ihe cursor to the curve rale setting 

ilern you want to adjust and touch Ihe RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor. 

Initiol volue: P WS: 0% 

Adjustment range: -100%-1100% 

a Ihe ill 

Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode. 

Repeat Nfs arocedure lor each paini. 

• Pilch curve copy function 

Move the cursor to COPY item and touch IheRTN buPon to switch to ihe data input mode. 

Select the copy destination condition by 

scrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN 

button. Select the jYES} ond touch the RTN 

button. 

<Normal eondiliun mixing c 

The mixing curve rafe should be started 

using smaller values. 

For a rotor with a clockwise operotion 

direction, when pilch was inpul a? the plus 

side, sel these parameters so that mixing 

is in the clockwise direction. First, trim ot 

hovering and then adjust the neutral 

posiliort. 

1. Adjustment between slow ond hoveling 

Repeatedly hover from take off ond lond 

a! o constant rote molched to your own 

rhythm. Then oa'just the pitch so that the 

nose of the helicopter remains steady 

when the throttle is raised ond lowered. 

2. Throllle high side ('climbing end diving from 

hoveringl 

Repeal climbing ond diving from hovering 

ol o constant rate mo'ched lo your own 

rhythm and adjust the pitch so that the nose 

does not collect when ihe throttle- is raised 

ond lowered. 

<Idle up condition mixing curvo 

Sc-I Ihe rrvv-ng fate so Ihcil It e ivdder direction 

at nigh-speed flight is straight oheoc). Adjust lor 

i'titictinii',;.-- -j/jr 

CiVRO mixhitf 

This function used to adjust gyro sensitivity. 

The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/ 

AVCS mode) can be sel for each condition. 

The (tyro sensitivity can be switched with each 

condition or the switch. (5 sensitivities} 

•Compatible with 3 axis gyro{CGY75tT). 

Note: When using the [Gyro2)/[Gyro3] function, 

assign [Gyro2j/(Gyro3] to any channel on the 

function screen. 

Always set to both (Control) and (Trim) for 

ihe [Gyro] function at the Function menu In 

the linkage menu. 

• Select (GYRO) est the Model menu ond access the 

setup screen shown below by touching the RTN 

button. 

. Select lii«! laid 

RtN butlcn. 

HOME/EXIT t 

-FLRWSFL FTCTIME#! 

°eTMel EDIT NORMAL # 1 , 

0,,'he/ ''sv RUD fives 88X< 

7 GV2HIL HUCS 50 X< EOX> 

GVSELE fiVCS 50«< EOX> 

•'(he edif conditions con be 

changed by touching the 

51 button. 

•Setup screen selection 

•Condition/Swiich selection 

iWhen Ihe GYRO function bulion is selected, 

each GYRO detailed setting screen 

appears. 

ON: (initial setting) 

v»Mode selection: 

•Fins tuning VR settings |AVC5J/{NORMj 

• Gyro sensitivity adjustment 

Setting method 

• Gyru type selection 

Move the cursor to the gyro type selection 

item and touch the RTN button to switch, to 

the dota input mode. Select the gyro type 

by scrolling ihe touch sense. 

(GY): When a Futaba GY gyro is used 

(NORM): When other than Fu'abo GY gyro is 

Touch the RTN bul'cn lo change the gyro 

type ond return to the cursor mode. 

•Wl.cn a l

:ut;iba GY gyro is uual and {GY) lyjx is sjlwicd, 

ihe scnsiliviiy sc. value is directly ccad in bolli lite AVCS 

ruic! NORM im-dcs. 

• Operation mode selection (CIV gyro) 

Move the cursor to Ihe operotion mode 

seleciion liem ond touch the RTN Pulton 

to switch to the dola input mode. Select 

Hie operation mode by scrolling the touch 

(AVCS]: AVCS mode 

(NORM): Normal mode 

Touch Ihe RTN bulion to change the 

operation mode and return to fhe cursor 

mode. 

• Sensitivity setting 

Move the cursor to the late item and touch 

the RTN oullori to switch to the data inpul 

mode. 

Adjust Ihe sensilivi-y by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 80% 

Adjustment range: 0-100% 

4 Wlion llit RTN bulion is touciitil lor one scconti, die 

• fine tuning VR settings 

Move the cursor to the |--) item 

the RTN button lo access Ihe 

screen, Selecl ihe control. 

•t'ur a description (111. SL 

Move Ihe cursor to the rate item and touch 

the RTN bution to switch to the dala input 

mode. 

Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value: 0% 

Adjustment range: -20-+20% 

'When ihu HTN bulion i„ unKiRid I'm one .econ.i, (|K-

.0 Ihe i ,e.) 

Touch the RTN button lo return lo the cui 

mode. 

<EXAMPI .r>Rud(icr gyro gain is changed with 

a switch (SP) irrespective of condition. 

Generally, gain is interlocked with condition 

ond changes a role. 

How to change two rates in the same 

candilion here. 

!. Selecl (GYRO) at Ihe Model menu ond 

access the setup screen shown below by 

touching the RTN button. 

COM3 

?. Move fhe cursor (c (he (CONDj item 

and touch the K'TN bulTori lo access the 

seleciion scieen. Selecl Ihe |SWj. Touch the 

RTN bution to reiurn lo Ihe cursor mode. 

3. 'i number snows the present sv/:tcn sloie. in 

Ihe state ot n ; a cursor is movea 'o i—j and 

RTN is pushed. 

k (S?) is chosen by (H/VV SciECT) and then a 

top is turned ON. 

Jt Sfi sc LO Tt 

J2S8SFRDT2 

J3 $C SO LS T3 

SO SH RS T4 — 

5. (TYPE GY) and [RATE] of a state of "## 1 =SF 

top'ore sel uj;. 

6. tt is a setuo OT "»v. . Move the cursor to the 

{#(] /(em arid touch the !?JN button to 

access ihe select-on screen, selecl Ihe (^2). 

Touch Ihe RTN bution to re;um lo the cursor 

mode. 

\Uiet Mei:« rUc-5k-«|»U:r i-ts»C«i= 
GOV i\KNOR mixing 

7. Move the cursoi to the :—] item and touch 

the f?TN button. 

8. (SHI is chosen, by [H/w SELECT] and then a 

bottom is turned ON. the R1N button. 

9. [TYPE GV) and [RATE] of ci state of "«2^SF 

boJIo/r.'oje $£>t up. 

5 SF: Bottom = #2 

When using a Futaba GV-I/GY7UI/CGY750 

governor, this function is used to switch the Rl'M 

of tin? helicopter's rotor head. The- rotor heat! speed 

can be switched with eaci) condition or (he switch. 

'The u :e.l t. £ lt:C 

•win::) usi:i^ a:) i;u!c|H.'!i<le:it governor [ON';.'[OIT) switch, 

IHE AU\'((ONj/[C)JTJ) coimeclor of DIE governor ID 

CHS sml m (ho switch (,) CHS (GowmofJ) si ilic Pimclion 

itteuu of the Linkage Menu. 

Nole: Always sef (Control) and (Trim) to [--] 

for {Governor) of the Function menu of the 

linkage menu. 

COND 

MODE 

RRTE^50. 0 X 

FINE] TUNING-

+0X 

1=5 

NORMAL INH 

< +0« 

Fine tur 

• f<PM nai'JStrnent 

Setting method 

• Activate the mixing 

When us^'ng this IvncHor., move )he cc'i'or to 

the [INH] item and touch the RTN button fo 

switch to the dota input mode. 

Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch 

ate the mixing 

node. (ON i 

'The disphy blinks. 

Touch the RTN button to activ 

ond relum to the cursor r 

displayed.) 

When fHe Governor is changed trem the 

default inhibited (INH] state to the active 

(ACT| siole. Ihe endpoint menu will be 

displayed and it is possible to utilize ihe 

endpolnts for this given condition. 

'When Iho junction N Ji I <• >r Si'iup 

screen, the governor :|KU setting ainuici etui ponit servo 

travel Mil limit pui:i: are now im:i.-ili/c\i. 

iiulialimi lo HXi ami lite iiim! point is ini:i.ili-v<t Ui 155. 

•Whtn opmilion is Lh,in;>o! Uj INH at all otidilums. Ilkservo -ravel U initialized vo 10(1 olid Xbt.' limit point is 

?cd 10 

•reSEyEHSftffllTT" 

VES oa 

Use the SensorTouch to scroti to either YES 

(incorporate the default eridpoints] or NO 

fendpoinls aie not utilized. Press the Relurn 

{RTN) button lo confirm Ihe selection made. 

• Rl'M adjustment 

Move the cursor to the rote item and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. 

Atijusl ihe rpm by scrolling the touch sensor, 

initial value: 50% (15Q0rDm] 

Adjustment range: OFF. 0- 1 J0% (OFF. 

70CK'iSOOtpm) 

•Wh.cn i!k RTN bma-ii is toucfitrd I'm uric second, the 

Touch the RTN button to relurn to the cursor 

mode. 

• Unit diplay seletiiott 

Move the cursor to the UNIT item and touch 

the R1N button to switch to the dcto input 

mode. Select the unit by scrolling Ihe louch 

sensor. 

Touch the RTN button ?o change the 

operation mode and return to the cursor 

mode. 

U:<ht \to-.u Obi; r I'm • 161 

• Diplay mode selection 

"MODI"" .s CVjiil.iyiior slnaiM (v pcrfinmsJ 

'in oidei iv> ii5.o die Oiivcnuu l\inc{i• jn of the 7 MSG. it is 

side '(H) rpn mode. 

When the MODE of the Governor screen's 

model menu is changed, the change is also 

indicated on-screen. 

The chart below indicates the mode percentage and 

the corresponding RPM. 

MODE 0% 50% 100% 1 10% 

1000-2000rom lOOOrpro I500rc« 2000rpm 2100rom 

1000-2500rp.ii tOOOrpm 1500rp.it XnOOipm nroorWn 

I000-3500rpm lOUOrpm lSOOrpnt 3500rprn 3y00rprn 

700-2000/-WH TOOrpm ISOOrpm 2000rpm 21 OOrprii 

700-2500rpm 700rpm 1 SOOrpni 2500rpm 2700rpnt 

70G-3500rom 700r(yn ISOOrpm 3500fpm 3SOO'pm 

<t'XAMi>Lfc>RPM rate is changed uidi a 

switch (SF) irrespective (if condition. 

Generolly. RPM role is interlocked wit) 

condition and changes a rate. 

How lo change two rates in the samt 

condition here. 

1. Select [GOVERNOR) at the Model mem 

and access Ihe setup screen shown 'oelov 

by touching ;he RTN button. 

2. Move the cursor to Ine [COND] item 

ond toucn tne R1N button to occess the 

selc-clion screen, selec? the fSW). ;ouch the 

RTN button to return to the cursor made. 

And |INH] is set to [ACT], 

SWSR 

3. " number shows the present switch stale. In 

the state of H 1 a cursor is moved to H ond 

RTN is pushed. 

7. Move Ihe cursor to the [-: item and touch 

Ihe RTN buSton. 

8. |SF) is chosen by [H/W SELECT) and then a 

bottom is turned ON. the RTN butlon. 

9. (MODE) and [RATE] ol a state of "i(2=SF 

bcltonT'are set up. 

• Fine tuning VR sec tings 

Move the cursor lo the [— 

Ihe RTN button to acce 

screen. Select the control. 

11 Of ill .'itch S. 

l/j/tljjV .,ri: of tl 

I. {SF] is chose.n by [H/W SELECT] c 

lop is turned ON. 

Move the cursor to the rate item artel touch 

the RTN bulloi" to switch to the data input 

mode. 

Adjust the trim rote by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

Initial value!: 0% (Orpmj 

Adjustment range: -20~+2i)% (-200-+200.'prrij 

Touch the RTN button tc return to the cursor 

>. [MODE) ond [RATE; of a state of ' *M=SF 

top'ore set up. 

SF:T°p = #1 .Thenumber 

\ of a SW state 

>. It is a setup ot ff2 . Move tne cursor to 

the [SI] item and touch the RTN button 

to access the selection screen. Select the 

[!J2j. Touch the RTN button to return lo the 

cursormode. And [INH] is sel to [ACT]. 

163 
HiVIER 8T1/ST2 :r selling 

The Timer funeiion may be set Cor any desired 

time, i.e. engine run lime, .specified limes for 

competitions, etc. Two independent timers are 

provided lor your use. The timers are stored 

independently with each model, meaning that 

when you switch between model setups, the timer 

associated with tiie new model is brought up 

automatically. 

The timers may be set to start and slop from the 

motion of any switch or stick. You may set ihe ON and 

OFF difvcrroiis lively, foidr (finer has a capacity of up 

to 59 minutes 59 seconds. 

liach tinier may be set tin- count-down (DOWN 

mode) or count up (L'i' mode) operation with a 

target lime or lor count up lo 99 hours 59 minutes 

(HOUR mode). 

If a large! time is set mid the timer reaches the set 

time, a buzzer sound for each count is generated. 

Countdown timers sound one short beep during 

tiie iasi twenty seconds and two short beeps during 

the Inst ten seconds before reaching the target, then 

i Select ST I or ST2 cjf too home screen and 

coll the setup screen shown below by 

louching the RTN button. 

a long tone at the target time, and continue counting 

wiili displaying n minus {••) sign. Count-up timers 

also beep the last twenty and ten seconds, beep the 

target time, and keep counting upwards until shut 

down. 

A mode which sounds an alarm each minute of 

ihe lime remaining up to the timer alarm time can 

he selected. 

The HOUR mode is convenient when used in 

engine maintenance peiiod and other long-term 

measurements. 

•When the HOUR n 

is displayed on the 

, "xx (htiur): , 

- display. See. 

TIMER 

ST1 10:00.00 RESET 

MODE DOWN START SR 

ALARM 10S00E|STOP SB 

MEMORVOFF RESET SC 

Vibes OFF 

<SensofTouch,M> 

if ti • (oils' 

TYPE, I 

WE 2 ifgj 

TOE 3 §@) 

1YPE4 ma 

'Vibes"type 

& 

Timer setting 

•Up timer/down timer setting 

Move the cursoi to the [MODE] item and 

touch Ihe RTN button to switch lo the dale 

input mode. 

Select the mode by scrolling Ihe touch sensor 

and touch the SIN button. 

!UP|: Up timei 

jDOWN|: Down timer 

[HOUR): Hour mode timer 

• Time)- lime selling 

Move the cursor to ihe [ALARM] item and 

touch the RTN button lo switch to the doia 

input mode. 

Set the time by scrolling Ihe touch sensor. 

[00]:(00]:[min|:(sec] 

Touch the RTN bulton to end the adjustment 

and return to the cursor mode, 

• Smith setting 

Move the cursor to Ihe Hern of the switch you 

want lo set, occess the switch setup screen 

by touching Ihe RTN bulton. Select the switch 

and ON ciiiec?ion. 

[I'or h cictiiilal liosaijitioii uf ;ho scltiny nicibml, seo I.S'.viu'b 

[StART]: Start switch ' 

[STOP]: Stop switch 

[RESET]: Reset switch 

• .Memory setting 

Move the cursor to the [MEMORY] item and 

touch the RTN button lo switch to the data 

inpul mode. 

Select the mode by scrolling the- touch sensor 

and touch the RTN button. 

[OFF): Memory function OFF 

[ON): Mode where the timer not reset when 

turned power o'f and switched the model. 

• A mode which sounds an ahum each minute 

can be selected. 

Change the setting using Ihe "1-' bulton (or 

"4'" button). 

"•K: Alc/m sounds each minute of the time 

elapsed from timer star?. (Conventional 

mode) 

'4-": Alarm sounds ecch minute of the time 

remaining up to Ihe alarm time. 

er operation 

• Timer ST I arid ST2 uie storied/stopped by 

p'e-setected start/slop switch. 

• To reset a time', opeicle tne pre-selecled 

reset switch, or move the cursor to Ihe [RESET] 

display on the timer screen and touch the 

RTN button. 

165 

Swil.ch SoHtrtj?, Method 

The various functions used in the T)<1SG can 

be activated by a switch. For the purposes of this 

manual, a stick position, VR position, etc. slia/i be 

commonly refetred to as a switch in all cases. That 

Switch selection 

is, whenever tiie manual indicates thai something is 

operated via a switch, it is possible for the user tc 

activate this idling via a slick, stick position, etc. 

wiieh is selected at a mixing function, etc.> the selection screen shown below is called. 

(Switch selection screen example] 

liBTPPffWI 

J1 Sfl SE LDTl 

J2 SB SF RD T2 

J3 SC SG LS T3 

J4 SD SH RS T4 SB 

ON/OFF 

Switch selection 

I. Use ihe touch sensor ?o move the cuisor 

(highlights] to the switch you went to 

select and touch ;he RfN button. 

•The viich blinks. 

2. To return to the p'eceecling screen, move 

the cursor to the ?H/W Sf-ICCT] at the top 

of the screen and touch ihe RTN button. 

Or. move the cuisor to Ihe [ON/OFF] and 

call Ihe ON/OFF position setting screen by 

touching Ihe RTN button. 

When switch is selected 

When switch was selected. ON/OFF position 

letting is also performed. 

•Tiie ONVOIT scuinn ol\Meh pusiliim is displayed. 

I. Whc-n you wont lo change the ON/OFF 

setting, use the touch sensor to move the 

cuisor arid touch the RTN button ?o switch 

to Ihe dalo input mode. Switch tiie ON/ 

Off display by scrolling Ihe touch se-nsoi. 

•ON OIT display blinks. 

7. When ihe RTN button is touched, the ON/ 

OFF setting Is changed. (Touch the Si 

button to stop the- change.) 

3. To return to the proceeding screen, move 

the cursor to the (ON/OFF] cl Ihe lop of 

Ihe screen and louch the RTN button. 

sliek, trim lever, or kntih selected 

Wlien a stick, trim lever, or knob is used as 

wiieh, two operation modes can be selected: 

. When you wont to change the mode, 

move the cursor to [MODE} item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the 

e'eto inpul mode. Switch Ihe display 

to Ihe mode you wont to change by 

scrcfiing the fouch sensor and then make 

the change by touch ng the RTN button. 

•Mode: [L(Nj/[SYM] 

Alternate mode setting 

• ALTERNATE mode: [OFF]/[ON| 

1. Move fhe cuisor to the (AiJEffNArSj item 

one! touch tiie RTN button to switch to the 

dola input mode. 

2. Change to the mode you want to set by 

scrolling the touch sensor. 

•The nimlc ilispt.iy blinks. 

3. Touch the RTN button. (Touch the SI button 

to slop Ihe change.) 

A. To return to the proceeding screen, move 

ihe cursor Jo the [ON/OFF] o: the lop of the 

screen ond touch Ihe RTN button. 

Operation modes 

The operation modes available when stick, irim 

lever, or knob was selected are described below. 

This mode sets ON/OFF to the left or right (up 

>r down) with the set point as the reference. 

Symmetrica! mode [SYM[ 

Left and right (up and down) operations a 

symmetrical near the neutral position. For insiani 

when you want to switch D/R with the ailer 

stick, when the stick is' moved to the le/l or rig 

DR can be turned on at the same position. 

Shifting the ON/OI'f point 

The ON/OFF point can be shifted. ON/OFF £ 

i free position can be changed. 

•Black range: OFF range 

•White range: ON range 

{Setting method] 

1. Firs;, use the touch sensor to move the 

cursor lo Ihe (POS| item. 

2. Move the stick. Ir;m lever, or knob lo the 

point you want to change ond touch the 

RTN button. The point is shifted. 

3. To return to the preceeding screen, move 

the cursor to Ihe [ON/OFF] al the lop of 

the screen ond touch the RTN button. 

166 '•AWwiuHs- ApjSWidh-' -j(>7 
Logic switch (Condition Select function only) 

The logic switch (unction lets you turn opeiaiion on and olfby combining (wo switches. 

Logic mode 

AND: When both switches ore ON. Ihe 

condition is ON. 

OR: When either switch is OH. the condition 

is ON. 

EX-OR: When the two switches are in 

different states, the condition is ON. 

SINGLE 

Switch mode selection 

1. Move the cursor to the [SINGLE) item and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

2. Select the (LOG!C| by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

•[LOGIC] ilisplay Winks. 

3. Touch the RTN button lo change to the. 

logic switch- mode. 

(Logic switch selling screen} 

raa 

— B(fO — 

Logic mode .selection 

1. Move the cursor to the logic mode item 

end touch the RTN bution lo swilch lo the 

daiu input mode. 

2. Select the logic mode by scrolling the 

touch sensor. [AND. OR or EX-OR] ' 

•The muk' display blinks. 

3. Touch the R1N button to change to the 

logic mode. 

Swich selection 

. 1. Select trie right and lett switch respectively. 

(Ro-Ci! to the description ot the previous 

poge.) 

To return to the preceeding screen, move 

the cursor to the [SWHCH] ot ihe lop of the 

screen and touch Ihe R'lN button. 

R.TARA CORPORATION 1'iwiw '-X! 475 32 6982. facsimile: +SI 4 "5 32 

!!*.(! Yjl-ulcikj, Clir-vi-iiium, {"how-gii;), Oiiba-k«i, Jajiiul 

vTUTAKACOKl'OKATION' 2012.10 (!)